INDEX
SECTION
A.
B.
C.
PAGE
Notice Inviting Bids
A-1
Instructions to Bidders
A-3
Bid Submittal Documents
Bid Form and Proposal to the City of Laguna Beach
B-1
Certification of Contractor’s License
B-6
Compliance with Civil Rights Act
B-7
Designation of Subcontractors
B-8
Bidder’s Bond to Accompany Proposa
B-9
Non-Collusion Affidavit
B-10
Statement of Financial Responsibility
B-11
Acknowledgement of Water Quality Requirements
B-12
Technical Ability and Experience References
B-13
Bidder’s List
B-14
General Provisions
1.
Standard Plans and Specifications
C-1
2.
Contractor’s License
C-1
3.
Beginning and Completion of Work
C-1
4.
Liquidated Damages
C-1
5.
Working Hours
C-1
6.
Award of Contract
C-1
7.
Execution of Contract
C-2
INDEX (Continued)
SECTION
PAGE
8.
Contract Bonds
C-2
9.
Insurance
C-2
10.
Guarantee
C-3
11.
Water
C-3
12.
As-Built Plans and Specifications
C-3
13.
Shop Drawings
C-3
14.
Recycled Materials
C-3
15.
Extra Work – Tool and Equipment Rental
C-4
16.
Extra Work - Contractor
C-4
17.
Extra Work - Sub-Contractor
C-4
18.
Indemnity
C-4
19.
Trench Excavation - Plan for Protection from Caving
C-4
20.
Payroll Records
C-4
21.
Construction Schedule and Commencement of Work
C-5
22.
Irregular Proposals
C-5
23.
Cleanup and Dust Control
C-5
24.
Water Pollution Control
C-6
25.
Regulatory Fines
C-7
26.
Unfair Business Claims
C-7
27.
USA & Survey Marking Removal
C-7
28.
Project Information Signage
C-7
INDEX (Continued)
SECTION
PAGE
D. Sample Contract, Bonds and Insurance Certificate
Sample Contract
D-1
Sample Faithful Performance Bond
D-5
Sample Labor and Materials Bond
D-7
Sample Certificate of Insurance
D-9
E. Technical Specifications
F. Geotechnical Report
F-1
G. Project Plans
G-1
SECTION “A” - NOTICE INVITING BIDS
and
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
CITY OF LAGUNA BEACH
NOTICE INVITING BIDS
FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
Glenneyre Parking Structure, Structural Rehabilitation
N-1
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that sealed bids for the Structural Rehabilitation of
Glenneyre Parking Structure in the City of Laguna Beach will be received at the Office of the
City Engineer of the City of Laguna Beach, 505 Forest Avenue, Laguna Beach California, until
2:00 p.m. on February 9th, 2012, at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud.
N-2 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK: In general, the work comprises the construction of
structural strengthening of the existing parking structure including placing new piles and concrete
shear walls and FRP overlays on existing columns, in the City of Laguna Beach.
N-3 AWARD OF CONTRACT: (a) The City reserves the right after opening bids to reject
any or all bids, to waive any informality (non-responsiveness) in a bid, or to make award to the
lowest responsive, responsible bidder and reject all other bids, as it may best serve the interest of
the City. (b) As a condition of award, the successful bidder will be required to submit payment
and performance bonds and insurance.
N-4 CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE CLASSIFICATION: The Contractor shall possess a
valid Class “A” Contractor License at the time of submitting bids, in accordance with provisions
of Chapter 9, Division III of the California Business and Profession's Code.
N-5 WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS: In accordance with the provisions of Sections
1773.2 of the California Labor Code, copies of the general prevailing rate of per diem wages as
determined by the State Director of Industrial Relations are available on the Internet at the World
Wide Web site of the State Department of Industrial Relations at www.dir.ca.gov under Statistics
and Research. It shall be mandatory upon the contractor to whom the contract is awarded and
upon any subcontractor under him to pay not less than said specified rates to all workers
employed by them in the execution of the contract. All parties to the contract shall be governed
by all provisions of the California Labor Code relating to prevailing wage rates; Sections 17701781 inclusive.
N-6 RETAINAGE FROM PAYMENTS: The Contractor may elect to receive 100 percent
of payments due under the Contract Documents from time to time, without retention of any
portion of the payments by the City, by depositing securities of equivalent value with the City in
accordance with the provisions of Section 22300 of the Public Contract Code.
A-1
CITY OF LAGUNA BEACH
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
Glenneyre Parking Structure, Structural Rehabilitation
1
BID SECURITY: Each bid shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier’s check or
Bid Bond in the amount of 10 percent of the total bid price, payable to the City of Laguna Beach.
For any required bonds, the company issuing Bid Bonds, Labor and Material Bonds, and Faithful
Performance Bonds must be an insurance company or surety company duly authorized to issue
such bonds in the State of California. The City shall not accept a surety provided by a surplus
line broker; nor shall the City allow a Contractor to substitute a bid surety after the bids are open.
2
PRE-BID CONFERENCE: There is no pre-bid conference scheduled for this project.
3 ADDRESS AND MARKING OF BIDS: The envelope enclosing the Bid shall be sealed
and addressed to the City of Laguna Beach, and shall be delivered or mailed to the office of the
City Engineer at City Hall, 505 Forest Avenue, Laguna Beach, CA 92651. The envelope shall be
plainly marked in the upper left-hand corner with the name and address of the Bidder, and shall
bear the words “Bid For the Structural Rehabilitation of Glenneyre Parking Structure,”
followed by the date and hour of opening Bids. The certified or cashier’s check or Bid Bond
shall be enclosed in the same envelope with the sealed bid.
4 CONTENTS OF BIDS: All bid submittal documents (pages B-1 to B-15) of the contract
documents must be completed, executed and returned in the sealed bid. These documents shall
be affixed with the signatures and titles of the persons signing on behalf of the bidder. For
corporations, the signatures of the President or Vice President and Secretary or Assistant
Secretary are required, and the Corporate Seal shall be affixed to all documents requiring
signatures. In the case of a partnership, the signature of at least one general partner is required.
5
PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE: All communications relative to this project shall be
directed to Lisa M. Penna, PE, Consulting Project Manager at lpenna@lagunabeachcity.net, of
the City of Laguna Beach, CA, prior to opening bids. All questions relating to interpretation of
the Contract Documents or products must be submitted in writing, and responses will be in the
form of Addenda to the Notice Inviting Bids.
6
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (DBE) CONSIDERATION: The
City of Laguna Beach hereby affirmatively ensures that disadvantaged business enterprises will
be afforded opportunity to submit bids in response to this notice and will not be discriminated
against on the basis of race, color, national origin, ancestry, sex or religion in any consideration
leading to the award of contract.
7
JOINT VENTURES: In the case of joint ventures, each person comprising the joint
venture shall have a Contractor’s license at the time of award (Business and Professions Code
Section 7028.15(c). However, the joint venture itself must have a “joint venture license” not
later than the time of the award of bid (Business and Professions Code Section 7029.1).
A-3
8 PAYMENT BOND: The Contractor will be required to post a payment bond guaranteeing
the payment to subcontractors and other persons furnishing labor, materials and/or equipment
with respect to the project in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the estimated
Contract price.
9 BUDGETARY LIMITATION: The Contractor shall be aware that $500,000 to $700,000
has been appropriated in the City’s budget for this project.
A-4
SECTION B - BID SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS
CITY OF LAGUNA BEACH
PUBLIC WORKS
DEPARTMENT
BID SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS
FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF
Glenneyre Parking Structure, Structural Rehabilitation
SUBMITTED BY:
CONTRACTOR
STREET ADDRESS
CITY
(
)
TELEPHONE
(
)
FAX NUMBER
ZIP
INDEX TO BID SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS
SECTION
PAGE
B. Bid Submittal Documents
Bid Form and Proposal to the City of Laguna Beach
B-1
Certification of Contractors License
B-6
Compliance with Civil Rights Act
B-7
Designation of Subcontractors
B-8
Bidders Bond to Accompany Proposal
B-9
Non Collusion Affidavit
B-10
Statement of Financial Responsibility
B-11
Acknowledgement of Water Quality Requirements
B-12
Technical Ability and Experience References
B-13
Bidder’s List
B-14
BID FORM AND PROPOSAL
TO
THE CITY OF LAGUNA BEACH
FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF
Glenneyre Parking Structure, Structural Rehabilitation
Name of Bidder:
Business Address:
in the City of
, State of
County of
, Telephone No. (
,
,
,
)
,
TO THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LAGUNA BEACH:
Pursuant to and in compliance with your notice inviting sealed proposals (bids) and the other
documents relating thereto, the undersigned bidder, having familiarized itself with the terms of
the contract documents, local conditions affecting the performance of the contract, and the cost
of the work at the place where the work is to be done, hereby proposes and agrees to perform
within the time stipulated in the contract, including all of its component parts and everything
required to be performed, and to provide and furnish any and all of the labor, material, tools,
expendable equipment, and all utility and transportation services necessary to perform the
contract and complete in a workmanlike manner, all of the work required in connection with the
construction of said work all in strict conformity with the plans and specifications and other
contract documents, including all Addenda, on file in the Public Works Department of the City
for prices hereinafter set forth.
Final determination of contract award will be made by the City Council after bids are received.
The undersigned, as bidder, declares that the only persons or parties interested in this proposal as
principals are those named herein; that this proposal is made without collusion with any other
person, firm, or corporation; and bidder proposes and agrees, if the proposal is accepted, that
bidder will execute a contract with the City in the form set forth in the contract documents, and
that bidder will accept in full payment thereof the following prices, to wit:
B-1
Bid Sheet
for
Glenneyre Parking Structure, Structural Rehabilitation
Item
No.
1
Description and
Bid Unit Price
Estimated
Quantity
Desc: Mobilization not to exceed 5% of Total Base Bid Amount
1 LS
Unit Price in Figures:
$___________________________
&
Unit Price in Words:
2
Desc: Clear and Grubb (Remove existing signs, existing
electrical/mechanical fixtures/equipment/connections, fire
sprinklers etc.)
Unit Price in Figures:
&
Unit Price in Words:
4
Unit Price in Words:
Unit Price in Words:
6
&
/100 dollars
&
/100 dollars
Unit Price in Words:
1 LS
$___________________________
&
/100 dollars
Desc: Construct new concrete shear wall and connect to existing
structure.
Unit Price in Figures:
3 EA
$___________________________
Desc: Placing new footings (Grade Beam, Pile Cap, Shallow
footings, slab on grade, etc.)
Unit Price in Figures:
1 LS
$___________________________
Desc: Placing new piles (Drilling, Reinforcement and Concrete,
including temporary shoring.)
Unit Price in Figures:
5
/100 dollars
Desc: Selective demolition (cladding, planters, brick veneer, slab on
grade, etc.)
Unit Price in Figures:
1 LS
$___________________________
Unit Price in Words:
3
/100 dollars
$___________________________
&
B-2
/100 dollars
1 LS
Extended
Amount
Bid Sheet
for
Glenneyre Parking Structure, Structural Rehabilitation
Item
No.
7
Description and
Bid Unit Price
Estimated
Quantity
Extended
Amount
Desc: Repair damaged elements (Seal cracks on roof level, SoG,
walls, planters, curbs, stairs, elevated deck, etc.) CITY
ESTABLISHED ALLOWANCE
1 LS
$15,000
Unit Price in Figures:
Unit Price in Words:
8
Unit Price in Words:
Unit Price in Words:
Unit Price in Words:
&
/100 dollars
Unit Price in Words:
1 LS
$___________________________
&
/100 dollars
1 LS
$___________________________
&
/100 dollars
Desc: Punch list and Substantial Completion
Unit Price in Figures:
25 EA
$___________________________
Desc: Replace and/or Reinstall signs, electrical, mechanical,
plumbing, lights, fire-sprinkler system, striping, etc.
Unit Price in Figures:
11
/100 dollars
Desc: Rebuilding/placing new masonry work including veneer and
cladding at columns, planters, parapets, and new wall, etc.
Unit Price in Figures:
10
&
Desc: Preperation and installation of FRP wraps on columns
Unit Price in Figures:
9
$25,000
1 LS
$___________________________
&
/100 dollars
Total Bid Amount in Figures: $___________________________________
B-3
All bids are to be computed on the basis of the given estimated quantities of work, as indicated in
this proposal, multiplied by the unit price as submitted by the bidder. In case of a discrepancy
between words and figures, the words shall prevail. In case of an error in the extension of a unit
price, the corrected extension shall be calculated. The corrected, extended amounts shall be
added to determine the corrected total bid amount. The bids will be compared on the basis of the
corrected amounts.
The estimated quantities of work indicated in this proposal are approximate only, being given
solely as a basis for comparison of bids. The undersigned has carefully checked all of the above
figures and understands that the City will not be responsible for any errors or omissions on the
part of the undersigned in making up this bid.
The undersigned agrees that, if Bidder fails to deliver the executed contract and required bonds to
the City within ten (10) working days from the date of mailing of a notice to Bidder, by and from
the City, that the contract is ready for execution, then the proceeds of check or bond
accompanying the bid shall become the property of the City of Laguna Beach.
Accompanying this proposal is (Circle One): (1. Cash 2. Certified Check 3. Cashier's Check 4.
Bond). The amount of the (cash, certified check, cashier’s check or bond) shall be 10% of the
amount bid for the more expensive bid alternative.
The undersigned is aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code, which require
every employer to be insured against liability for workers’ compensation or to undertake selfinsurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and agrees to comply with such
provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this contract.
___________________________________
Telephone Number
Bidder's Name
___________________________________
Date
Authorized Signature
___________________________________
Authorized Signature
________________________________
Type of Organization (Individual, Corporation or Co-Partnership)
List below names of President, Secretary, Treasurer and Manager if a corporation, and names of
all co-partners if a co-partnership:
_____
________
President
Secretary
Treasurer
Manager
_________
B-4
CERTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE
The undersigned is licensed in accordance with the Statutes of the State of California, providing
for registration of contractors. In accordance with California Public Resources Code, Section
7059 (b), the City requires that the Bidder be licensed by the State of California in one of the
following disciplines:
Class “A” General Engineering Contractor
LICENSE NUMBER:
LICENSE
EXPIRATION DATE:
LICENSE
CLASSIFICATION(S):
TYPE OF ORGANIZATION:
I CERTIFY THAT ALL INFORMATION AND REPRESENTATIONS CONTAINED IN THIS
BID FORM ARE CORRECT, AND THIS STATEMENT IS MADE UNDER PENALTY OF
PERJURY.
AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE:
PRINT NAME:
TITLE:
for
CONTRACTOR:
ADDRESS:
TELEPHONE NUMBER:
DATE:
B-5
COMPLIANCE WITH CIVIL RIGHTS ACT
AND
AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS
1)
During the performance of the construction contract, contractor shall agree to and
be bound by the following:
a)
Equal Employment Opportunity
In connection with the execution of the contract, contractor shall not
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment
because of race, religion, color, gender, age, marital status, sexual
orientation, AIDS or AIDS-related symptoms (including HIV positive
findings), or national origin. Actions encompassed by this prohibition
shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment,
upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment, or recruitment
advertising; layoff or termination; rate of pay, or other forms of
compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship.
b)
Sanctions for Noncompliance
In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of the contract, City shall impose such
contract sanctions as City may determine to be appropriate,
including, but not limited to:
(1)
withholding of payments to contractor under the
contract until contractor complies, and/or
(2)
cancellation, termination, or suspension of the
contract, in whole or in part.
B-6
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Bidder certifies that the table below contains the names of any and all subcontractors who’s
individual sub-bids exceed one-half of 1 percent of the total bid amount, or $10,000, whichever
is greater, and who’s sub-bids were used in making up Bidder’s bid, and that the subcontractors
listed will be used for the work for which they bid, subject to the approval of the City Engineer,
and in accordance with the applicable provisions of the specifications. No change may be made
to the listed subcontractors, except upon prior approval of the Engineer.
Item Of
Work
Subcontractor Name, Classification,
&Contractor’s License Number
% Of
Work
Address
Total Percentage
Note: Do not list alternative subcontractors for the same work
Bidder's Name
By:
Authorized Signature
Title
Date
B-7
Phone
BIDDER'S BOND TO ACCOMPANY PROPOSAL
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS,
that we,
, as Principal,
and
, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City
of Laguna Beach, California,
in the sum of
dollars ($
), lawful money of the United
States for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, jointly and
severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THE FOREGOING OBLIGATION IS SUCH that, if the proposal
of the above bounden principal for the construction of [PROJECT NAME], the City of Laguna
Beach, is accepted by the City Council of said City, and if the above bounded principal shall duly
enter into and execute a contract for such construction, and shall execute and deliver the two (2)
bonds described in the "Notice Inviting Bids" within ten (10) working days from the date of the
mailing of a notice to the above bounden principal, by and from said City of Laguna Beach, that
said contract is ready for execution, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it
be and remain in full force and effect, and the amount specified herein shall be forfeited to said
City.
In the event that any principal above named executed this bond as an individual, it is
agreed that the death of any such principal shall not exonerate the surety from its obligations
under this bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we hereunto set our hands and seal this
, 20__.
Corporate Seal (If Corporation)
,
Principal
By:
,
Surety
By:
(Attach acknowledgment of
Attorney-in-Fact)
B-8
day of
NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER
AND SUBMITTED WITH BID
State of California
County of ____________________________________________
ss.
______________________________, being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he or she is
____________________________________________ of _______________________________
the party making the foregoing bid that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any
undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid
is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or
solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded,
conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that
anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly,
sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the
bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of
that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract
of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true;
and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any
breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or
paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association,
organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham
bid."
Bidder's Name
By:
Authorized Signature
Title
Subscribed and sworn to before me
Date
this
day of
, 20__.
Notary Public
My commission expires:
B-9
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
If requested by City, Bidder agrees to submit a statement of financial responsibility within 48
hours after the bid opening if Bidder is the apparent low bidder. Bidder shall provide such
information as may be requested by City to evidence financial solvency of Bidder, and Bidder’s
financial ability to pursue and complete the work.
B-10
Bidder's Name
By:
Authorized Signature
Title
Date
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF WATER QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
The contractor shall execute the following form, acknowledging the requirements of Title16,
Water Quality Control, of the City of Laguna Beach Municipal Code:
I am aware of the provisions of Title 16 of the City of Laguna Beach Municipal Code, which
prohibits any discharge of unauthorized pollutants into the City’s storm drain system, such as
waste materials and wastewater generated by construction activities including, but not limited to
the following: painting, staining; use of sealants and glues, use of lime; eroded soils, sediment
and particulate materials; use of herbicides, pesticides, fertilizers, wood preservatives and
solvents; disturbance of asbestos fibers, paint flakes or stucco fragments; application of fuels,
oils, lubricants, hydraulic, radiator or battery fluids; construction equipment washing; concrete
pouring and cleanup; use of concrete detergents; steam cleaning or sand blasting; use of chemical
degreasing or diluting agents; and use of super chlorinated water for potable water line flushing.
During construction, disposal of such materials should occur in a specified and controlled
temporary area on site physically separated from potential storm water run-off, with ultimate
disposal in accordance with local, state and federal requirements.
Such “discharges” of material other than stormwater are allowed only when necessary for
performance and completion of construction practices and where they do not: cause or contribute
to a violation of any water quality standard; cause or threaten to cause pollution, contamination
or nuisance; or contain a hazardous substance in a quantity reportable under Federal Regulation
40 CFR Parts 117 and 302.
B-11
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT:
Bidder's Name
By:
Authorized Signature
Title
Date
TECHNICAL ABILITY AND EXPERIENCE REFERENCES
Bidder submits herewith a statement of at least three projects of similar character to that
proposed herein which Bidder has performed and successfully completed for public agencies
within the last two years. Bidder is advised that additional references may be requested after bid
opening.
Project Name And Contract
Dollar Amount
Year
Completed
Agency/Organization
Reference Person And
Phone Number
1. __________________________
Name:_________________
_
Phone:(
)
2. __________________________
Name:_________________
_Phone:(
)
3. __________________________
Name:_________________
_Phone:(
)
B-12
Project Name And Contract
Dollar Amount
Year
Completed
Agency/Organization
Reference Person And
Phone Number
Bidder's Name
By:
Authorized Signature
Title
Date
B-13
CITY OF LAGUNA BEACH
BIDDERS LIST
All bidders/proposers are required to provide the following information for all DBE and nonDBE contractors, who provided a proposal, bid, quote, or were contacted by the proposed
prime. This information is also required from the proposed prime contractor, and must be
submitted with their bid/proposal. The City of Laguna Beach will use this information to
maintain and update a Bidders List to assist in the overall annual goal DBE goal setting
process.
Firm Name: _______________________________
Phone:_________________
Address:
Fax:___________________
________________________________
_______________________________
Contact Person: ____________________________
No. of Yrs. In Business:____
Is the firm currently certified as DBE under the new regulations (49 CFR Part 26)?
YES
NO
Type of work/services/materials provided by firm:____________________________
___________________________________________________________________
B-14
What was your firm’s Gross Annual receipts for last year?
____________ Less than $1 Million
____________ Less than $5 Million
____________ Less than $10 Million
____________ Less than $15 Million
____________ More than $15 Million
B-15
SECTION C - GENERAL PROVISIONS
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.
STANDARD PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Except as noted herein, or on the
project plans, all work shall be performed in accordance with the most recent edition of
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION
(GREENBOOK) and STANDARD PLANS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION as amended to include any and all supplements. The technical specifications are included
herein and the California Building Code 2010 Edition.
2.
CONTRACTOR'S LICENSES. The contractor shall be licensed in accordance with
Chapter 9, Division 3, of the California Business and Profession Code. In accordance
with California Public Resources Code, Section 7059 (b), the City requires that the
Bidder be licensed in one of the following disciplines:
Class “A”
The contractor shall also obtain a valid Business License, issued by the City of Laguna
Beach, prior to commencing work.
3.
BEGINNING AND COMPLETION OF WORK. The contractor shall begin work within
ten (10) working days after the date of mailing of the Notice to Proceed, and shall
complete the work within 80 WORKING DAYS working days from the date of mailing
of the Notice to Proceed. When the Contractor is delinquent on any submittal that is
required before the start of work, such as but not limited to, construction schedule, traffic
control plan, etc., the Notice to Proceed will be issued with conditions to comply with all
the requirements before the start of work. Any such delay in submittals will cause
Contractor to lose those days from the specified time of completion after the issuance of
Notice to Proceed.
4.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES.
Section 6-9 of the Standard Specifications shall be
modified to provide for TWO Thousand Dollars ($2,000.00) per working day for
liquidated damages.
5.
WORKING HOURS. The working hours shall be limited to the hours of 8:00 a.m. to
5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, in accordance with the City of Laguna Beach
Municipal Code. The special provisions may include additional limitations.
6.
AWARD OF CONTRACT. The award of contract, if awarded, will be to the lowest
responsible bidder whose proposal complies with all requirements of the Notice Inviting
Bids and these General Provisions. The City, however, reserves the right to reject any or
all such bids, and to waive any informality in the bids. No bidder may withdraw its bid
for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the time set for opening thereof. However,
the City will return the proposal guarantees, except any guarantees, which have been
forfeited, and except bidder's bonds, to the respective bidders whose bids were not
accepted, within ten (10) days after the award of the contract or rejection of all bids.
C-1
7.
EXECUTION OF CONTRACT. The contract shall be signed by the successful bidder
and returned to the City, including insurance certificates with endorsements and the
contract bonds as specified in Section 2-4 of the Standard Specifications, as amended
herein, within ten (10) working days from the date of mailing of an award notice to
Bidder, from the City. The form of contract agreement to be executed by the contractor
will be supplied by the Public Works Department of the City. No proposal shall be
considered binding upon the City until the execution of the contract by the City.
8.
CONTRACT BONDS. The bonds shall name as principal the Bidder only. Bonds,
which name any additional entity other than the Bidder as principal, may be deemed nonconforming. Bonds shall be of the form attached to Section D and secured from a surety
company duly authorized to issue such bonds in the State of California. The Labor and
Materials Payment Bond shall remain in force until thirty-five (35) days after the date of
recordation of the Notice of Completion.
9.
INSURANCE. The contractor must provide written confirmation naming the City as
additional insured under contractor's insurance policies, as well as providing certificates
acceptable to the City evidencing amounts of insurance coverage held. $2,000,000
general liability coverage, per occurrence, $3,000,000 aggregate, shall be provided. Such
policies shall remain in force and effect for one year after completion of, and City’s
acceptance of the work performed pursuant to the contract.
The following endorsements must be indicated on the insurance certificate:
a) The City of Laguna Beach, its elective and appointive boards, officers, agents and
employees are named as additional insured in the policy as to the work being
performed under the contract;
b) The coverage is primary and no other insurance carried by the City of Laguna Beach
will be called upon to contribute to a loss under this coverage;
c) The policy covers blanket contractual liability;
d) The policy limits of liability are provided on occurrences basis;
e) The policy covers broad form property damage liability;
f) The policy covers personal injury, as well as bodily injury liability;
g) The policy covers explosion, collapse and underground hazards;
h) The policy covers products and completed operations;
i) The policy covers use of non-owner automobiles; and
j) The coverage shall not be cancelled nor materially altered unless thirty (30) days
written notice is first given to the City of Laguna Beach.
Prior to execution of contract, Contractor shall provide City with insurance certificate(s)
evidencing the insurance described above by companies rated Grade A or better and Class
VII or better by the latest edition of Best’s Key Rating Guide, and shall attach appropriate
endorsements. For Worker’s Compensation insurance, Grade B+ or better and Class VII
C-2
or better is acceptable. All insurance companies must be duly authorized to conduct
business in the State of California.
Contractor shall provide to the City, within ten working days after the date of notice of
award of contract, the aforementioned insurance certificate(s) with endorsements, which
must meet the requirements of the specifications and comply with the contract
documents. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in annulment of the
award, forfeiture of the proposal guarantee, and City will pursue award to the next
qualified responsive bidder.
10.
GUARANTEE. The contractor and its supplier shall guarantee for a period of two (2)
years after recordation of the Notice of Completion, all materials and all workmanship
against any defects whatsoever. Any such defects shall be repaired at the contractor's
expense. See Special Provisions for additional warranties on some items.
11.
WATER. The contractor shall make its own provisions for obtaining and applying water
necessary to perform its own work. The water supply to the area is provided by the
Laguna Beach County Water District (949) 494-1041, or the South Coast Water District
(949) 499-4555.
12.
AS-BUILT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. The contractor shall maintain a control
set of Plans and Specifications on the project site at all times. The Contractor shall
update the control set at the end of each working day, as directed by the Engineer. The
control set of plans shall be delivered to the City upon completion of the work.
13.
SHOP DRAWINGS. The contractor shall furnish complete assembly, layout and setting
drawings for each item of material to be fabricated or manufactured to specifically fit or
otherwise meet the requirements of these General Provisions, Project Plans and Special
Provisions. Shop drawings shall be in accordance with Section 2-5.3 of the Standard
Specifications.
14.
RECYCLED MATERIALS. The Contractor is required to salvage, recycle and dispose
of all construction waste and shall properly document in writing to the City the amounts
and types of all construction waste salvaged, recycled and disposed, all in compliance
with Public Contract Code, Chapter 4, Section 12169 and Section 12213.
The Contractor shall coordinate the removal from the site of all structures, foundations,
paving, vegetation and any associated debris from the site to a legal refuse disposal site
other than landfill. Those materials that can be salvaged, reused or recycled may be
retained or sold by the Contractor. All remaining materials for disposal must be taken to
Sunset Environmental material recovery facility (MRF) at 16122 Construction Circle
West in Irvine for recycling and diversion of waste from a landfill. The Contractor shall
be responsible for all processing and disposal fees. The Contractor is required to submit a
report to the Engineer detailing the types and weights (in tons) of waste generated at the
site, type and quantity salvaged reused or recycled by the Contractor, and the quantity
hauled to MRF.
An acceptable report form is the California Department of
C-3
Transportation Sample Form A-1.70, which can be accessed via the Internet at:
http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/construc/manual2001/appendix/appendix1.pdf. This report is
required prior to final payment for all work performed in accordance with this contract.
To ensure proper disposal of materials, proof in the form of tickets or receipts shall be
submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours of any materials being hauled off the project
site.
Payment for disposal of construction debris shall be considered included in the contract
unit prices paid for other items of work and shall be considered incidental for
accomplishing this work, as specified herein, and no additional compensation will be
allowed therefore.
15.
EXTRA WORK – BASIS FOR ESTABLISHING COSTS – TOOL & EQUIPMENT
RENTAL. In Section 3-3.2.2(c) of the Standard Specifications, delete the second
paragraph and replace with the following: rates to be used in determining equipment
rental costs shall not exceed those listed in the current edition of Caltrans’ Labor
Surcharge & Equipment Rental Rates, available on the Internet at
http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/construc/equipment.html. Standby rates shall apply for
complete working days that equipment is idle. The reasonable allowance for overhead
and profit, including home office overhead, shall be 15% for equipment, materials and
other items and expenditures. If the equipment is not listed, the rate allowed shall be that
calculated for a comparable item.
16.
EXTRA WORK – BASIS FOR ESTABLISHING COSTS – LABOR. In Section 32.2(a), add the following: The reasonable allowance for overhead and profit, including
home office overhead, shall be 20% for labor, and 15% for all other materials, equipment
rental, and other items and expenditures.
17.
EXTRA WORK – MARKUP – WORK BY SUBCONTRACTOR. In Section 3-3.2.3(b)
of the Standard Specifications, add the following: The Contractor’s reasonable allowance
for overhead and profit, including home office overhead, shall be 10% of the first $5,000
of the subcontracted work, and 5% of the subcontracted work in excess of $5,000. The
cost of all subcontracted extra work shall be combined for the purpose of determining the
Contractor’s allowance for overhead and profit, except that costs for each subcontractor
engaged solely to perform extra work shall be considered separately from all other
subcontracted extra work.
18.
INDEMNITY: The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the City, its
officials, officers, employees, agents and representatives from and against any and all
claims, including attorneys’ fees and reasonable litigation expenses, for causes of action
of loss, damages, bodily injuries, including death, damage to or loss of use of property
caused by the negligent or willful acts or omissions of the contractors, or its officers,
employees, agents, representatives or subcontractors in connection with or arising out of
the performance of the work pursuant to the contract.
C-4
19.
TRENCH EXCAVATION; PLAN FOR PROTECTION FROM CAVING:
In
accordance with Section 6705 of the Labor Code, the successful bidder shall submit a
detailed plan for approval by the Engineer, showing the design of shoring, bracing,
sloping or other provisions to be made for worker protection from the hazard of caving
ground during the excavation of any trench or trenches in excess of five feet in depth. If
such plan varies from the shoring system standards, than it shall be prepared by a
registered civil or structural engineer.
20.
PAYROLL RECORDS: Contractor shall keep and shall cause each subcontractor
performing any portion of the work under this Contract to keep an accurate payroll
record, showing the name, address, social security number, work classification, straight
time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid
to each journeyman, apprentice, worker, or other employee employed by Contractor in
connection with the work. The payroll records shall be certified and shall be available for
inspection at all reasonable hours at the principal office of Contractor pursuant to the
provisions of Section 1776 of the Labor Code. Each week, the Contractor must submit
certified payroll records for the prime and all subcontractors working on the job, to the
Engineer. Progress payments will be withheld pending receipt of any outstanding
records.
21.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK:
The
Contractor’s proposed construction schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer within ten
(10) working days after the date of notice of award of contract. The schedule shall be
supported by written statements from each supplier for materials or equipment indicating
that all orders have been placed and acknowledged, and setting forth the dates that each
item will be delivered. The schedule shall be submitted electronically in a Gantt Chart or
Calendar format, and shall include daily activities for each bid item, as approved by the
Engineer.
Prior to issuing the Notice To Proceed, the Engineer will schedule a pre-construction
meeting with the Contractor to review the proposed construction schedule and delivery
dates, arrange the utility coordination, discuss construction methods and clarify inspection
procedures.
The Contractor shall submit periodic progress reports to the Engineer by the tenth day of
each month. The report shall include an updated construction schedule. Any deviations
from the original schedule shall be explained. Progress payments will be withheld
pending receipt of any outstanding reports. Invoices shall be signed by the Contractor
and shall include the 10% reduction for retention. A separate spreadsheet shall be
attached to each invoice that lists each bid item, unit price and bid cost, as well as
quantities and costs for current work, work previously completed and work completed to
date.
22.
IRREGULAR PROPOSALS: Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or provisions
attached to a proposal will render it irregular and may cause its rejection. The completed
C-5
Proposal Forms shall be without interlineations, alteration, or erasures. Alternative
proposals will not be considered unless specifically requested. No oral, telegraphic, or
telephonic proposal, modification, or withdrawal will be considered.
23.
PROJECT SITE MAINTENANCE - CLEANUP AND DUST CONTROL: In Section 78.1 of the Standard Specifications, add the following: This work shall consist of
furnishing and applying water as required and as may be directed by the Engineer to
control dust which is the result of the Contractor’s operations. Also, this work shall
consist of sweeping dirt and dust from streets and/or sidewalks adjacent to the project if
said dirt and/or dust is a result of the Contractor’s operations. The Contractor shall clean
adjacent streets by power brooming any excavated or removed material, which may have
been spilled, tracked or blown onto adjacent streets or areas. Payment for cleanup and
dust control shall be considered included in the contract unit prices paid for other items of
work and shall be considered incidental for accomplishing this work, as specified herein,
and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. CONTRACTOR WILL BE
LIMITED TO THE USE OF ONLY 5 PAID PARKING SPACES DURING THE
COURSE OF CONSTRUCITON.
24.
PROJECT SITE MAINTENANCE – WATER POLLUTION CONTROL: In Section 78.6 of the Standard Specifications, add the following: “Water Pollution” shall mean an
alteration of the quality of waters by fuels, oils, and other harmful materials, to a degree
which adversely affects such waters for beneficial uses, or facilities which serve such
beneficial uses. “Beneficial uses” shall include, but not necessarily be limited to,
domestic, municipal, agricultural and industrial supply power generation, recreation,
aesthetics enjoyment, navigation, and preservation and enhancement of fish, wildlife and
other aquatic resources or preserves.
Where required, permits for erosion and water pollution control shall be obtained from
the appropriate jurisdictional agency before the start of construction. Such features as
drainage, gutters, slope protection blankets and retention basins shall be constructed
concurrently with other work and at the earliest practicable time. Care shall be exercised
to preserve vegetation beyond the limits of construction.
The Contractor shall also conform to the following provisions with respect to water
pollution control:
1) Oily or greasy substances originating from the Contractor’s operations shall not be
allowed to enter the ground water or be placed where they will later enter a live stream,
channel, drain, or other water conveyance facility.
2) Fresh portland cement or fresh portland cement concrete shall not be allowed to enter
the flowing water in steams, channels or storm drains.
3) After the completion of the Work, the Work site shall be cleared of debris and restored
to a condition equal to or better than that existing prior to construction.
C-6
Should the Contractor violate any of the provisions of the subsection, or if pollution
occurs in the work area for any reason, the Contractor shall immediately notify the
Engineer, and shall, within 5 calendar days, submit written confirmation describing the
incident and corrective actions which have been taken. If pollution, for whatever reason,
is detected by the Engineer prior to notification by the Contractor, the required written
confirmation shall also include any explanation of why the Contractor had not notified the
Engineer.
The City may institute any further corrective actions as deemed necessary for abatement
of water pollution if the Contractor has violated any of the above noted provisions. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in the corrective actions. Failure to
comply with the requirements of this Section may result in the suspension of work per
Section 6-3 of the Standard Specifications. Payment for water pollution control shall be
considered included in the contract unit prices paid for other items of work and shall be
considered incidental for accomplishing this work, as specified herein, and no additional
compensation will be allowed therefore.
Prior to the start of any work, the Contractor shall execute an Acknowledgement of Water
Quality Requirements, for the project, on the City’s standard form as provided in Section
D. This form certifies that the Contractor will abide by all local, state and federal
requirements.
25.
REGULATORY FINES: The following shall be added to Section 5-2 of the Standard
Specifications: The Contractor shall be responsible for any damages the City may incur
as a result of any sewage spills or illicit discharges to the City’s storm drain system or any
receiving waters, resulting from the Contractor’s operations, including any associated
regulatory fines.
26.
UNFAIR BUSINESS CLAIMS: In entering into this Contract, the Contractor or
subcontractor to supply goods, services or materials pursuant to this Contract offers and
agrees to assign to the City all rights, title and interest in and to all causes of action it may
have under section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Sec. 15) or under the Cartwright Act
(Chapter 2 (commencing with section 16700) of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and
Professional Code), arising from purchases of goods, services or materials pursuant to the
Contract or subcontracts. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the
time the City tenders final payment to the Contractor, without further acknowledgment by
the parties.
27.
USA MARKING REMOVALS: The Contractor shall use chalk-based paint to mark the
limits of work.
Prior to final acceptance of work, the Contractor shall remove
Underground Service Alert (USA) and survey markings placed in relation to the project
from all surfaces, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the City.
These removals include all markings left by all public and private utility agencies related
C-7
to the scope of work, including but not limited to local water, sewer, gas, electric, cable
and phone utilities. All paint on asphalt shall be covered with black paint, using a
fogging method. All paint on concrete shall be removed using a pressure washer. All
runoff from that operation shall be contained and removed in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer.
28.
PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNAGE: The Contractor shall furnish and install, at no
cost to the City, a sufficient number of project information signs PER THE CITY’S
DIRECTION.
C-8
SECTION D - CONTRACT, BONDS AND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
C-9
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF
Glenneyre Parking Structure, Structural Rehabilitation
CITY OF LAGUNA BEACH
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this
day of
,
20__, by and between CITY OF LAGUNA BEACH, a municipal corporation of the State of
California, hereinafter referred to as "CITY" and
,
Contractor's License No.
, hereinafter referred to as "CONTRACTOR,"
WITNESSETH:
That the CITY and the CONTRACTOR, for the consideration hereinafter stated, mutually
agree as follows:
1. The complete contract includes all of the contract documents, which are incorporated
herein by this reference, to wit: Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Form and
Proposal to the City of Laguna Beach, General Provisions, Special Provisions, Drawings, Plans,
Performance Bond, Labor and Material Bond, Certificate of Insurance, this Agreement and all
modifications and amendments thereto. The contract documents are complementary, and that
which is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all.
2. In the performance of the services under the AGREEMENT, CONTRACTOR shall
be, and is, an independent contractor, and is not an agent or employee of the CITY. The CITY
shall not in any way or for any purpose become, or be deemed to be, a partner of
CONTRACTOR in its business or otherwise, or a joint venturer, or a member of any joint
enterprise with CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall not at any time or in any manner
represent that it or any of its agents or employees are agents or employees of the CITY. The
CONTRACTOR has and shall retain the right to exercise full control and supervision of the
services, and full control over the employment, direction, compensation and discharge of all
persons assisting CONTRACTOR in the performance of required services. CONTRACTOR
shall be solely responsible and hold the CITY harmless for all matters relating to the payment of
CONTRACTOR’s employees, including compliance with Social Security, withholding and all
other regulations governing such matters. Neither CONTRACTOR nor any of
CONTRACTOR’s employees shall, at any time, or in any way, be entitled to any sick leave,
vacation, retirement or other fringe benefits from the CITY; and neither the CITY nor any of its
employees shall be paid by the CITY at the rate of time and one-half for working in excess of
forty hours in any one week or more than eight hours in any one day. Neither CONTRACTOR
nor any of CONTRACTOR’s employees shall be included in the competitive service, have any
C-10
property right to any position, or any of the rights an employee may have in the event of
termination of this AGREEMENT.
3. CONTRACTOR shall perform everything required to be performed, shall provide and
furnish all the labor, materials, necessary tools, expendable equipment, and all utility and
transportation services required for the following work of improvements:
Glenneyre Parking Structure, Structural Rehabilitation,
all in accordance with bidders proposal dated
.
4. CONTRACTOR agrees to perform all the said work and furnish all the said materials
at his own cost and expense, such as are set forth in the specifications to be furnished by the
CITY, necessary to construct and complete in a good workmanlike and substantial manner and to
the satisfaction of the City Engineer of the CITY, the work hereinafter set forth in accordance
with the plans and the specifications therefor adopted by the CITY and as prepared by the
following:
.
In compliance with Public Contracts Code, Chapter 4, Section 12169 and Section 12213,
CITY requires the CONTRACTOR to provide, prior to final payment by CITY, a certification in
writing of the minimum, or the exact, percentage of recycled content in the products used in the
performance of the work of improvement.
5. CITY agrees to pay and CONTRACTOR agrees to accept in full payment for this
work of improvement above agreed to be performed, the stipulated sum of
Dollars ($
).
CITY agrees to make monthly payments and final payment in accordance with the
method set forth in the specifications and other contract documents.
CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that if this Contract involves a project
specified in Section 9203 of the California Public Contract Code with a Contract price that
exceeds five thousand dollars ($5,000), City will withhold ten percent (10%) of the Contract
price until the Notice of Completion is issued and recorded.
6. CONTRACTOR agrees to commence construction of the work provided for herein
within
( ) working days after the date of Notice to Proceed, and to
continue in a diligent and workmanlike manner without interruption, and to complete the
construction thereof within
( ) consecutive working days from the
date of Notice to Proceed.
7. Time is of the essence of this Contract, and it is agreed that it would be impracticable
or extremely difficult to ascertain the extent of actual loss or damage, which the CITY will
sustain by reason of any delay in the performance of this Agreement. It is, therefore, agreed that
CONTRACTOR will pay as liquidated damages to the CITY the following sum:
_______________ Dollars ($
.00) for each day's delay beyond the time herein prescribed for
finishing work. If liquidated damages are not paid, as designated by the CITY, the CITY may
deduct the amount thereof from any money due or that may become due the CONTRACTOR
C-11
under this agreement in addition to any other remedy available to CITY. The CONTRACTOR
shall not be assessed liquidated damages for any delay caused by the failure of a public utility to
relocate or remove an existing utility required for the performance of this Contract.
8. CONTRACTOR will pay, and will require all subcontractors to pay, all employees on
said work a salary or wage at least equal to the prevailing salary or wage established for such
work as set forth in the wage determinations and wage standards applicable to this work, a copy
of which is on file in the Public Works office. Travel and subsistence pay shall be paid in
accordance with Labor Code Section 1773.8.
9. CONTRACTOR will forfeit to the CITY, as a penalty, Twenty-Five Dollars ($25.00)
for each calendar day or portion thereof for each workman paid (either by him or any
subcontractors under him) less than the prevailing rate described above on the work provided for
in this Agreement, all in accordance with Section 1775 of the Labor Code of the State of
California.
10. In the performance of this Contract, not more than eight (8) hours shall constitute a
day's work and not more than forty (40) hours constitute any one calendar week, and the
CONTRACTOR will not require more than eight (8) hours of labor in a day or more than forty
from any person employed by him hereunder, except as provided in the Labor Code of the State
of California. CONTRACTOR will conform to Article 3, Chapter 1, Part 7 (Sections 1810, et.
seq.) of the Labor Code of the State of California, and it is agreed that the CONTRACTOR will
forfeit to the CITY as a penalty the sum of Twenty-Five Dollars ($25.00) for each worker
employed in the execution of this Contract by the CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor for each
calendar day or calendar week during which any worker is required or permitted to labor more
than eight (8) and forty (40) hours, respectively, in violation of said article.
11. CONTRACTOR, by executing this Agreement, hereby certifies: "I am aware of the
provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which requires every employer to be insured
against liability for Workmans’ Compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with
the provisions of that Code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the
performance of the work of this Contract."
CONTRACTOR further agrees to require all subcontractors to carry Workmans’
Compensation Insurance as required by the Labor Code of the State of California.
12. CONTRACTOR will, prior to the execution of this Contract, furnish two bonds
approved by the CITY, one in the amount of One Hundred Percent (100%) of the Contract price,
to guarantee the faithful performance of the work, and one in the amount of One Hundred
Percent (100%) of the Contract price to guarantee payment of all claims for labor and materials
furnished. This Contract shall not become effective until such bonds are supplied to and
approved by the CITY.
C-12
13. If any action or arbitration is filed by either party to enforce or determine rights under
this Agreement or any other Contract document, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover
its reasonable attorneys' fees in addition to any other relief stated by the Court or arbitrator.
14. CONTRACTOR certifies that each and every one of its employees, and every
employee of its subcontractors, is not “ineligible” as the term is defined in Labor Code section
1777.1.
15. In entering into this Contract, the Contractor or subcontractor to supply goods,
services or materials pursuant to this Contract offers and agrees to assign to the City all rights,
title and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under section 4 of the Clayton Act (15
U.S.C. Sec. 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 (commencing with section 16700) of Part
2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professional Code), arising from purchases of goods, services
or materials pursuant to the Contract or subcontracts. This assignment shall be made and become
effective at the time the City tenders final payment to the Contractor, without further
acknowledgment by the parties.
16. CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that if this Contract involves a dollar
amount greater than or a number of working days greater than that specified in Labor Code
Section 1777.5, then the provisions of Labor Code Section 1777.5 govern this Contract. It shall
be CONTRACTOR’S responsibility to become fully acquainted and ensure compliance with
Labor Code Section 1777.5 for all apprenticable occupations.
17.
CONTRACTOR acknowledges the importance of child and family support
obligations and shall fully comply with all applicable state and federal laws relating to child and
family support enforcement, including but not limited to disclosure of information and
compliance with earnings assignment orders, as provided in Chapter 8 (commencing with
Section 5200) of Part 5 of Division 9 of the Family Code. CONTRACTOR further
acknowledges that, to the best of its knowledge, it has fully complied with the earnings
assignment order of all employees and has provided the names of all new employees to the New
Hire Registry maintained by the Employment Development Department.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Contractor, the City Manager and City Clerk of the
City have executed this Agreement pursuant to the City Council action of the day and year first
above written.
By
Title
CITY OF LAGUNA BEACH
A Municipal Corporation
City Manager - City of Laguna Beach
C-13
CORPORATE CERTIFICATE
I,
, certify that I am the
Secretary of the corporation named
as CONTRACTOR in the foregoing Contract; that
, who signed said Contract on
behalf of the CONTRACTOR was then the
of said corporation; and that said
Contract was duly signed for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its governing body
and is within the scope of its corporate powers.
(Corporate Seal)
C-14
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That
WHEREAS, the City Council of the CITY OF LAGUNA BEACH, has awarded to
, hereinafter designated as "Principal," a
contract for Glenneyre Parking Structure, Structural Rehabilitation, in
the City of Laguna Beach, in accordance with the plans and specifications
and other contract documents therefor; and
WHEREAS, said Principal is required under the terms of said Contract to furnish a bond
for the faithful performance of said Contract;
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the Principal, and
, organized and doing
business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of
, and licensed to transact surety
business in the State of California, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF
LAGUNA BEACH, hereinafter called the "Obligee," in the penal sum of
Dollars ($
), lawful money of the United State of America, for the payment of which sum
well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors,
jointly and severally and firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if the above-bounden
Principal, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns shall in all things stand to and
abide by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions and agreements in said
Contract, and any alteration thereof made as therein provided, on its part to be kept and
performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their
true intent and meaning, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Obligee, its officers and
agents, as therein stipulated, this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be
and remain in full force and virtue. And, the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates
and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract,
or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications accompanying the same, shall in
any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does thereby waive notice of any such change,
extension of time, alternation or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work or to the
specifications, and said Surety agrees that in case suit is brought on this bond, Surety will pay
City reasonable attorneys' fees to be fixed by the Court.
C-15
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, two (2) identical counterparts of this instrument, each of
which shall for all purposes be deemed an original thereof, have been duly executed by the
Principal and Surety above named, on the
day of
, 20___.
By
(Title)
(Surety Seal)
ADDRESS & TELEPHONE NUMBER
OF LOCAL BOND COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE:
(Address - Local Representative)
(Tel. Number - Local Representative)
PRINCIPAL
(Principal Seal)
(Attach Acknowledgments for
Surety and Principal)
By
Attorney-in-Fact
C-16
LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That
WHEREAS, the City Council of the CITY OF LAGUNA BEACH has awarded to
, hereinafter designated as "Principal," a Contract for
Glenneyre Parking Structure, Structural Rehabilitation, in the City of Laguna Beach, in
accordance with the plans and specifications, and other contract documents therefor; and
WHEREAS, said Principal is required to furnish a bond in connection with said Contract
providing that if said Principal or any of its subcontractors shall fail to pay for any materials,
provisions, provender or other supplies, or teams used in, upon, for or about the performance of
the work contracted to be done, or for any work or labor done thereon of any kind, or for amounts
due under the Unemployment Insurance Act, the Surety on this bond will pay the same to the
extent hereinafter set forth;
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the Principal, and
, organized and doing
business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of
, and licensed to transact
business in the State of California, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF
LAGUNA BEACH in the penal sum of
Dollars ($
), lawful money of the
United States of America, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made we bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if said Principal, its
subcontractors, heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall fail to pay for any
materials, provisions, provender or other supplies or teams used in, upon, for or about the
performance of the work contracted to be done, or for any work or labor thereon of any kind, or
for amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Act as required by the provisions of
Sections 4200-4208, inclusive, of the Government Code, then said Surety will pay the same in or
to an amount not exceeding the amount hereinabove set forth, and also will pay, in case suit is
brought upon this bond, such reasonable attorneys' fees as shall be fixed by the Court, awarded
and taxed as in the above-mentioned statute provided.
This bond shall inure to the benefit of any and all persons, companies and corporations
entitled to file claims under Section 1192.1 of the California Code of Civil Procedure, so as to
give a right to action to them or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond, and the said
Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time,
alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract, or the work to be performed thereunder, or the
specifications accompanying the same, shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it
does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alternation or addition to the
terms of the Contract, or to the work, or to the specifications.
C-17
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, two (2) identical counterparts of this instrument, each of
which shall for all purposes be deemed an original thereof, have been duly executed by the
Principal and Surety above named on the
day of
, 20___.
By
(Signature)
(Title)
(Surety Seal)
ADDRESS & TELEPHONE NUMBER
OF LOCAL BOND COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE:
(Address - Local Representative)
(Tel. Number - Local Representative)
PRINCIPAL
(Principal Seal)
(Attach Acknowledgments for
Surety and Principal)
By
Attorney-in-Fact
C-18
SAMPLE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE AND ENDORSEMENT
Description of Contract:
Type of Insurance:
General Liability, Automobile Liability,
Excess Liability, Workers’ Compensation
THIS IS TO CERTIFY that the following numbered policies have been issued by the belowstated company in conformance with the limits and requirements as set forth in the General
Provisions (Section "C").
NOTE:
CONTRACTOR
MUST
PROVIDE
WRITTEN
CONFIRMATION NAMING THE CITY AS ADDITIONAL
INSURED
UNDER
CONTRACTOR’S
INSURANCE
POLICIES, AS WELL AS PROVIDING CERTIFICATES
ACCEPTABLE TO THE CITY (ACCORD FORM OR
SIMILAR) EVIDENCING AMOUNTS OF INSURANCE
COVERAGE HELD.
The insurance company is required to give at least thirty (30) days written notice by registered
mail to the City of Laguna Beach prior to any material change or cancellation of said policy
or policies. Said policies shall remain in force and effect for one year after completion of, and
Citys acceptance of the work performed pursuant to the contract.
TYPE
GENERAL
LIABILITY
EFFECTIVE
POLICY NO'S.
DATE
EXPIRATION
DATE
AMOUNT
AUTOMOBILE
LIABILITY
EXCESS
LIABILITY
WORKER'S
COMPENSATION
Note: If Workers’ Compensation Insurance is provided by a different agency, a
form must be provided showing this coverage.
ENDORSEMENT:
As additional insured under these policies, this insurance shall cover and apply to the City of
Laguna Beach and its representatives and consultants, and each of its officers, and agents,
C-19
only while acting in their capacity as such, and only as respects operations of the original
named insured, its subcontractors, agents and employees in the performance of the abovereferenced Contract; Provided, however, that if the loss or damage is ultimately
determined to be the proximate result of the sole negligence of one or more of the aforesaid
additional named insured, this insurance shall not apply.
This endorsement shall not operate to increase the Company's total limits of liability hereunder.
The insurance company hereby waives its rights of subrogation against the additional named
insureds.
Named Insured
Insurance Company
Street Number
Street Number
City and State
City and State
By
Authorized Representative
Attach Acknowledgment
ACCORD (OR SIMILAR) FORM AND ANY OTHER FORM
EVIDENCING REQUIRED INSURANCE COVERAGE, SUCH AS FOR
WORKERS COMPENSATION INSURANCE, MUST ALSO BE
ATTACHED, AS INDICATED ABOVE.
C-20
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
Patching and repairs.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 1 Section "Summary of Work" for use of the building and phasing
requirements.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures
for selective demolition operations.
Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of the interior
of a building undergoing alterations and for the removal, salvage, or reuse of
materials in new construction.
Division 9 Section "Portland Cement Plaster" for material and construction
requirements for temporary enclosures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled,
salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's
property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify
contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare
them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations
or in locations indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and
reinstalled in their original locations.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the
Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the
Contractor's option.
B.
Historical items indicated remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage
each item in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner.
C.
Historical items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of
interest or value to the Owner, which may be encountered during selective demolition,
remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a
manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner.
1.
1.5
Cooperate with Owner's archaeologist or historical adviser.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Proposed dust-control measures.
C.
Proposed noise-control measures.
D.
Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following:
1.
2.
3.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and
ending dates for each activity.
Interruption of utility services.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4.
Use of elevator and stairs.
5.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work to ensure
uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building
and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
6.
7.
E.
Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged.
F.
Inventory of items to be removed by Owner.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
G.
H.
Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining
construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
selective demolition operations.
Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
1.
I.
1.6
1.7
BFL OWEN
Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural,
electrical, or mechanical conditions.
Landfill records indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill
facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully
completed selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
preinstallation conference requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition
area. Conduct selective demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
B.
Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively
demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Owner as far as practical.
C.
Asbestos: Asbestos is present in the building to be selectively demolished. A report on
the presence of asbestos is on file for review and use. Examine the report to become
aware of locations where asbestos is present.
1. Asbestos abatement is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
2. Do not disturb asbestos or any material suspected of containing asbestos except
under the procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
D.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.8
BFL OWEN
SCHEDULING
A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site
operations.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces
cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to
void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
2.1
REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces,
use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing
materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent
of selective demolition required.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the
intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and
extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect.
E.
Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might
result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or
adjacent structures during selective demolition.
F.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.2
BFL OWEN
UTILITY SERVICES
A.
Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except
when authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner
and to governing authorities.
a.
B.
Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is
required during changeover.
Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services serving building to be selectively demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
bypass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building
before proceeding with selective demolition.
4. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and
seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
C.
3.3
Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off,
disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective
demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified
in writing.
PREPARATION
A.
Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives,
acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective
demolition operations.
B.
Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents and
vermin before and during selective demolition operations.
C.
Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with
roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing
regulations.
D.
Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent
buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective
demolition area.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered
passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter
drip line of groups of trees to remain.
4. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and
removal of existing construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure
that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas.
5. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and
are exposed during selective demolition operations.
6. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
E.
Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) studs, 5/8inch (16-mm) gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch
(13-mm) fire-retardant plywood on the demolition side.
2. Insulate partition to provide noise protection to occupied areas.
3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.
4. Protect air-handling equipment.
5. Weatherstrip openings.
F.
Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to
preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be
selectively demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective
demolition.
3.4
POLLUTION CONTROLS
A.
Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of
dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.
1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or
objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
B.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device
that will convey debris to grade level.
C.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of
selective demolition.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.5
BFL OWEN
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A.
Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within
limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.
Complete selective demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing
supporting members on lower levels.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power
tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily
cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable firesuppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials
and promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to
avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris
and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or
framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of
removed items is prohibited.
10. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before
start of selective demolition operations.
B.
Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at
junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do
not use power-driven impact tools.
C.
Break up and remove concrete slabs on grade, unless otherwise shown to remain.
D.
Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the
Resilient Floor Covering Institute's (RFCI) "Recommended Work Practices for the
Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings" and Addendum.
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of
the methods recommended by RFCI.
E.
Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing. See
applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-7
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
F.
3.6
BFL OWEN
Remove air-conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants.
PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A.
Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction
by selective demolition operations.
B.
Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
C.
Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for
new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls to remain with an
approved masonry patching material, applied according to manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
D.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining
construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
E.
Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or
partitions extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of
uniform color and appearance.
1. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface.
2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
tolerances.
3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire
unbroken surface containing the patch after the surface has received primer and
second coat.
4. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if
necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
5. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where
feasible.
F.
3.7
Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface
of uniform appearance.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials
to accumulate on-site.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Burning: Burning of demolished materials will be permitted only at designated areas on
Owner's property, providing required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring
for burning materials until fires are extinguished.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-8
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.8
3.9
BFL OWEN
D.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on
Owner's property.
E.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of
them.
CLEANING
A.
Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation.
B.
Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition
operations.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE
A.
Remove the following:
B.
Remove and salvage the following:
C.
Remove and reinstall the following:
END OF SECTION 02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02070-9
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 02230
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section.
B.
Section Includes:
1. Removal of vegetation, grass, grass roots, shrubs, tree stumps, trees,
upturned stumps, weed growth, tree roots, brush, masonry, concrete, rubbish,
debris and other objectionable materials, within limits of the Work.
2. Removal of concrete and bituminous surfaces.
3. Removal of existing fences and gates.
C. Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.02
Section 02070
Section 03305
Section 9900
Sections 10425
Divisions 15 and 16
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit site plan indicating extent of site clearing.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition,
as a minimum requirement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
TREE AND STUMP REMOVAL
A. Remove trees and stumps indicated and/or required to be removed. Remove trees,
SITE CLEARING
02230-1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
together with bulk of roots, to a minimum depth of 4 feet below required grade, and
within a radius of approximately 7 feet beyond perimeter of trunk at grade.
B. Fill and compact excavation from tree and stump removal. Fill in 6 inch layers, each
compacted to 90 percent of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D 1557.
1. Back filling shall not commence until the excavation is inspected and
tested.
3.02
CONCRETE AND BITUMINOUS SURFACING REMOVAL
A. Break up and completely remove existing concrete surfacing, curbs, gutters, walks
and bituminous surfacing to indicated limits. Cutting shall be performed to a neat and
even line with proper tools or a concrete cutting saw. Minimum depth of cut shall be 11/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated. Remove concrete broken beyond the indicated
limits to the nearest joint or score line and replace with new concrete to match existing.
3.03
FENCING
A. Existing fences scheduled to remain may be removed to facilitate the Work, provided
they are installed to their original condition in accordance with requirements of Section
02821: Chain Link Fences and Gates.
B. Fencing indicated to be removed and not reinstalled shall be completely removed,
including footings. Fill and compact excavations.
C. Install chain link fencing indicated to be relocated or reset in accordance with
applicable requirements specified under Section 02821: Chain Link Fences and Gates.
3.04
CLEANUP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
SITE CLEARING
02230-2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 02466
DRILLED PIERS AND FOOTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Report of Geotechnical Investigation & Seismology Hazard Evaluation by Arroyo
Geotechnical, dated 12-26-03. For more information call (714) 940-6300, or fax (714) 9406399, or mail to: 2125 E. Katella Ave., Suite#200, Anaheim CA 92806.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes cast-in-place concrete drilled piers.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03300, “Cast-In-Place Concrete”.
1. 3
ALTERNATIVE PILING METHODS
The contractor may propose alternative method(s) and design in lieu of the drilled-in Cast-inplace concrete piles. Any such alternatives should be provided with detail design criteria and
construction procedure and should meet the project design needs. Any such changes should be
reviewed for acceptance prior to implementation. The cost of such reviews shall solely be the
Contractor’s responbility and be negotiated with the Consultant and his subs and contracted
directly with such entities. The method shall be acceptable by EOR, the building officials, and
the Owner. The permitting fee, if any, to process the substituation shall be in Contractor’s
expense. The actual demand loads can be provided by the Consulatant to the Constractor for
designing purposes, if requested.
1.4
UNDERPINNING
Excavation for underpinning shall be approved and continuouslty monitored by the Engineer.
Excavation shall be performed in limited sections ( not larger than 4 feet) along the entire length
of the existing footing where underpinning is needed. Only one section shall be excavated at a
time. At least two sections shall be left between two excavated sections, if two or more sections
are being excavated simultaneously. If the depth of excavation exceeds five feet, temporary
shoring shall be placed per OSHA requirements. If needed, grout can be placed over the surface
of the excavation for stabilization. Install the required anchor bolts into the existing footing prior
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
to placing concrete. Clean the surface of the new or existing concrete footings with a brush and
compressed air prior to placement of concrete. Place required reinforcing and tie to installed
anchor bolsts as shown in the drawings. Place concrete by use of tremie or bucket to limit the
maximum free drop of concrete to four feet.
1.5 OVER-EXCAVATION/BACKFILL
Contractor and its subs to void over-excavation or keep the amount of it to a minimum. If
necessary, the ever excavated spaces shall be back filled. Compacted fill material shall consist of
on-site soil or imported materials that are free of organics, oversized rocks (greater than 3
inches), and other deleterious material. On-site soil or imported materials to be used as the
compacted fill shall have at least 75 percent material passing the U. S. Standard No. 4 sieve and
an expansion index of no more than 20. All compacted fill shall be compacted to 95%
compaction in accordance with the current ASTM Test Method D 1557. The compaction shall
be observed and evaluated and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and governing agencies.
1.6
UNIT PRICES
A.
Basis of Bids: Base bids on indicated number of drilled piers; design length from top
elevation to bottom of shaft, extended through the bell, if applicable; and diameter of
shaft and bell.
B.
Basis for Payment: Payment for drilled piers will be made on actual net volume of
drilled piers in place and approved. The actual length, shaft diameter, and bell diameter,
if applicable, may vary to coincide with elevations where satisfactory bearing strata are
encountered, and with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by an
independent testing and inspecting agency. Adjustments will be made on net variation of
total quantities, based on design dimensions for shafts and bells.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
No additional compensation will be made for excavation, concrete fill,
reinforcement, casings, or other costs due to unauthorized overexcavating of
shafts or bells.
No payment will be made for rejected work.
Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required
for excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete
fill, and other items for a complete drilled-pier installation.
See Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for a schedule of unit prices.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
admixtures.
For each type of product specified.
Include reinforcement and
B.
Shop Drawings: For concrete reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing.
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
C.
Design Mixes: For each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when
characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
1.
1.8
BFL OWEN
Laboratory Test Reports: For evaluation of concrete materials and mix design
test.
D.
Welding Certificates:
Copies of certificates indicating compliance of welding
procedures and personnel with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
F.
Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in
installing drilled piers similar to those required for this Project.
B.
Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with provisions of ACI 336.1, "Specification for the
Construction of Drilled Piers," unless modified in this Section.
1.
C.
Survey Work: Engage a registered surveyor or licensed professional engineer to perform
surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Lay out each drilled pier to lines
and levels required before excavation and record actual measurements of each drilled
pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified
tolerances, and other specified data.
1.
D.
Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and cooperate
with Owner's testing and inspecting agency to provide data for required reports.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualify and engage an independent testing agency with
the experience and capability to conduct the following testing without delaying the
Work:
1.
E.
The slurry displacement method of installation will not be permitted.
Qualify testing agency, according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM C 1077, to
perform materials evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform the
welding processes for this Project according to the following AWS standards:
1.
2.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
F.
Trial Drilled Pier: Construct trial drilled pier of diameter and depth and at location
indicated or, if not indicated, of same diameter and depth as drilled piers located at least
3 diameters clear of permanent drilled piers, to demonstrate Installer's construction
methods, equipment, standards of workmanship, and tolerances.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.9
BFL OWEN
Install reinforcement, fill with concrete, remove temporary casings, and
terminate trial drilled pier 24 inches (600 mm) below subgrade and leave in
place.
Install permanent casings, excavate bell, excavate rock socket, and place slurry,
as required for permanent drilled piers.
When Architect determines that trial drilled pier does not meet requirements,
excavate for and cast another until trial drilled pier is accepted.
Under special conditions and with the approval of the Owner and the EOR and
formal request of the Constractor , the trial pile may be used as one of the
required piles.
G.
Test Tubes: Two 2”-diamter PVC tubes are generally required for testing of the concrete
consolidation. Unless specifically waived, Contractor and its subs shall place the tubes
and after testing fill the entire length of tubes with non-shrink high strength grout.
H.
Preinstallation Conference:
requirements of the LAUSD.
Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers.
If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled-pier
operations.
1.
B.
Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered
during excavation, consult Architect immediately for directions as to procedure.
Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping services and facilities in
operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.
Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is
available for information only. The report is not part of the Contract Documents.
Opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent
interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by the
geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions
drawn from this data by Contractor.
1.
2.
3.
Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations as
necessary.
The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual.
The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in the Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.1
2.2
REINFORCING MATERIALS
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M, Grade 400), deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars:
Grade 400).
C.
Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767 (ASTM A 767M), Class II, 2-oz./sq. ft.
(610-g/sq. m) zinc, hot-dip galvanized.
D.
Plain, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.
E.
Joint Dowel Bars:
Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615 Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M,
Grade 400). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
ASTM A 706, Grade 60 (ASTM A 706M,
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
B.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or F.
C.
Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
D.
Aggregates: ASTM C 33, 3/4-inch (19-mm) maximum aggregate size.
E.
Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94 requirements.
F.
Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions by mass of portland
cement or cementitious material.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
2.3
BFL OWEN
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 404. Unless otherwise indicated, mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts
sand, by volume, with sufficient water to permit flow during placement.
STEEL CASINGS
A.
Steel Pipe Casings:
ASTM A 283 (ASTM A 283M), Grade C; or ASTM A 36
(ASTM A 36M) carbon-steel plate, with vertical joints full-penetration welded according
to AWS D1.1.
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 7
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
B.
2.4
Corrugated-Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 929 (ASTM A 929M), steel sheet, zinc coated.
SLURRY
A.
2.5
Slurry: Pulverized sodium bentonite, pulverized attapulgite, or polymers, mixed with
potable water to form a stable colloidal suspension; complying with ACI 336.1 for
density, viscosity, sand content, and pH.
CONCRETE MIX
A.
Prepare design mixes, according to ACI 301, for concrete by either laboratory trial batch
or field experience method per Section 1905A.2 of CBC, using method-B and submit to
EOR for their approval. All backup data shall be prepared by independent testing
agencies (other than the supplier). Only data within the last five years is acceptable. For
trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
1.
2.
B.
C.
Compressive Strength (28 Day): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa).
Maximum Water-Cement Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.
Slump Limit: Capable of maintaining a slump of 4 inches (102 mm) for 2 hours
after placement unless a different value can be substantiated by the Contractor to
the satisfaction of the EOR.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at
point of placement having an air content as follows with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5
percent:
1.
D.
Do not use Owner's independent testing and inspecting agency.
Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to not exceed 15 percent of weight of
portland cement.
Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal-weight
concrete with the following properties:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
BFL OWEN
Air Content: 2.5 to 4.5 percent.
Concrete-mix design adjustments may be proposed when characteristics of materials,
project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94. Do not add
water after mixing.
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 8
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
BFL OWEN
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature
is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilledpier operations.
B.
The contractor shall consider access, headroom and other site conditions and limitations
for selecting the proper equipment and method(s) of construction.
EXCAVATION
A.
Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to bearing
elevations regardless of character of materials or obstructions encountered.
1. Obstructions: Unclassified excavation includes removal of unanticipated boulders,
concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions.
2. Obstructions: Removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other
unforeseen obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with
soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or under-reaming tools attached to drilling
equipment of size, power, torque, and down thrust necessary for the work, will be
paid according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
B.
Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified and includes excavation to bearing
elevations. Excavation will be classified as standard excavation, special excavation, and
obstruction removal, as follows:
1.
2.
Standard excavation includes excavation accomplished with conventional augers
fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, and under-reaming equipment
attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and down thrust necessary
for the work.
Special excavation includes excavation that requires special equipment or
procedures above or below indicated depth of drilled piers where drilled-pier
excavation equipment used in standard excavation, operating at maximum
power, torque, and down thrust, cannot advance the shaft.
a.
b.
Special excavation requires use of special rock augers, core barrels, air
tools, blasting, or other methods of hand excavation.
Earth seams, rock fragments, and voids included in rock excavation area
will be considered rock for full volume of shaft from initial contact with
rock.
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 9
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.
BFL OWEN
Obstructions: Removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other
unforeseen obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted
with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or under-reaming tools attached to
drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and down thrust necessary for the
work, will be paid according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
C.
Dewatering: Prevent surface and ground water from entering excavated shafts. Dewater
excavated shafts before concreting. Conduct water to site drainage facilities.
D.
Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations.
1.
2.
E.
Excavate bottom of drilled piers to level plane.
Remove loose material and water from bottom of excavation.
Notify and allow testing and inspecting agency to test and inspect bottom of excavation.
If unsuitable bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as
determined by Architect.
1.
2.
Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated, unless approved by
Architect.
Additional excavation will be paid according to Contract provisions for changes
in the Work.
F.
Make auger probe to a depth below bearing elevation equal to bearing area of drilled
pier. Determine whether voids, clay seams, or solution channels exist.
G.
Make auger probe to a depth of 96 inches (2400 mm) below bottom and visually inspect
and classify soil. Verify continuity and thickness of stratum.
1.
Test the first 3 drilled piers and 1 of every 6 drilled piers thereafter.
H.
Excavate shafts for closely spaced drilled piers and those occurring in fragile or sand
strata, only after adjacent drilled piers are filled with concrete and allowed to set.
I.
Slurry: Stabilize excavation with slurry maintained a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm)
above ground-water level and above unstable soil strata to prevent caving or sloughing of
shaft.
1.
2.
J.
Excavate and complete concreting of drilled pier on same day or redrill shaft and
clean, recirculate, desand, or replace slurry.
Clean bottom of each shaft before concreting.
Temporary Casings: Install watertight steel casings of sufficient length and thickness to
prevent water seepage into shaft; to withstand compressive, displacement, and
withdrawal stresses; and to maintain stability of shaft walls.
1.
2.
Remove temporary casings during concrete placement.
Temporary casings may be left in place or may be withdrawn during concrete
placement at Contractor's option.
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 10
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
K.
Bells: Excavate bells for drilled piers to shape, base thickness, and slope angle
indicated. Excavate bottom of bells to level plane and remove loose material before
concrete is placed.
1.
L.
Shore bells in unstable soil conditions to preclude cave-in during excavation,
inspection, and concreting.
Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Maximum Variation from Location: Not more than the lesser of 4.2 percent of
pier diameter or 3 inches (76 mm) from design center location.
Out-of-Plumb: Not more than 12.5 percent of pier diameter.
Out-of-Plumb: Not more than 1.5 percent of pier length.
Out-of-Plumb: Not more than 2 percent of pier length.
Concrete Cutoff Elevation: Plus 1 inch (25 mm), minus 3 inches (76 mm).
Bottom Area of Pier: Not less than 96 percent of pier area required.
Shaft Diameter: Not less than 98 percent or more than 110 percent of shaft
diameter indicated.
M.
If location or out-of-plumb tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction.
Submit design and construction proposals to Architect for review before proceeding.
N.
Inspection: Each drilled pier must be inspected and tested before placing concrete.
1.
2.
3.3
BFL OWEN
Provide and maintain facilities with equipment required for testing and
inspecting excavations. Cooperate with testing and inspecting personnel to
expedite the Work.
Notify EOR and Soil Engineer and testing agency at least 6 hours before
excavations are ready for tests and inspection.
PERMANENT STEEL CASINGS
A.
Install steel pipe casings of minimum wall thickness indicated with inside clear diameter
not less than diameter of drilled pier.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Install casings as excavation proceeds, to maintain sidewall stability.
Fabricate bottom edge of lowest casing section with a cutting shoe capable of
penetrating rock and achieving a water seal.
Connect casing sections by continuous penetration welds to form a watertight,
continuous casing.
Remove and replace, or repair, casings that have been damaged during
installation and that could impair strength or efficiency of drilled pier.
Fill annular void between casing and shaft wall with sand-cement grout.
Corrugated-Steel Casings: Provide corrugated-steel casings formed from zinc-coated
steel sheet.
1.
Corrugated casings may be delivered in sections or panels of convenient length,
and field connected according to manufacturer's written instructions.
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 11
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.4
3.5
BFL OWEN
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Comply with recommendations of CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating,
placing, and supporting reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or
destroy bond with concrete.
C.
Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts in a single unit.
D.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during
concreting. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
E.
Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished in
work of other Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required
position during final concrete placement.
F.
Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from
mechanical damage and exposure to weather.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Place concrete in a continuous operation and without segregation immediately after
inspection and approval of the shaft by an independent testing and inspecting agency.
B.
Place concrete by means of bottom discharge bucket, flexible drop chute, elephant-trunk
hopper, or tremie. Use chutes or tremies for placing concrete where a drop of more than
25 feet (7.6 m) is required, or pump concrete into place.
C.
Place concrete in a dry shaft, unless placement underwater or by slurry displacement is
approved by Architect.
1.
2.
Place concrete in slurry-filled shafts or underwater by tremie method or
pumping. Control placement operations to ensure tremie is embedded no less
than 60 inches (1500 mm) into concrete, and the flow of tremied concrete is
continuous from bottom to top of drilled pier.
Other methods of depositing concrete may be used, if approved by Architect.
D.
Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement operations to
maintain a head of concrete no less than 60 inches (1500 mm) above casing bottom.
E.
Screed concrete at cutoff elevation level and apply a scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff
elevation is above the ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to
required elevation.
F.
Construct a cold joint if concrete placement is delayed more than one hour. Level top
surface of concrete and insert joint dowel bars. Before placing remainder of concrete,
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 12
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
clean surface laitance, roughen, and slush with a commercial bonding agent or with a
sand-cement grout mixed at the ratio of 1:1.
G.
Protect concrete work, according to ACI 301, from physical damage or reduced strength
that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures.
1.
2.
H.
When hot-weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of
concrete, place concrete according to ACI 301 to maintain delivered temperature of
concrete without exceeding 90 deg F (32 deg C).
1.
3.6
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral-containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators.
Place concrete immediately on delivery. Keep exposed concrete surfaces and
formed shaft extensions moist by fog sprays, wet burlap, or other effective
means for a minimum of 7 days.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during excavation and
concrete placement for drilled piers.
B.
A drilled pier report will be prepared for each drilled pier as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Actual top and bottom elevations.
Top of rock elevation.
Description of soil materials.
Description, location, and dimensions of obstructions.
Final top centerline location.
Variation of shaft from plumb.
Shaft excavating method.
Design and tested bearing capacity of bottom.
Depth of rock socket.
Levelness of bottom and adequacy of cleanout.
Ground-water conditions and water-infiltration rate, depth, and pumping.
Description, diameter, and top and bottom elevations of temporary or permanent
casings.
Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, loss of ground, and
means of control.
Bell dimensions and variations from original design.
Date and time of starting and completing excavation.
Inspection report.
Position of reinforcing steel.
Concrete placing method, including elevation of consolidation and delays.
Elevation of concrete during removal of casings.
Location of construction joints.
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 13
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
21.
22.
C.
Remarks, unusual conditions encountered, and deviations from requirements.
Concrete testing results.
Soil Testing: Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of drilled piers
indicated have been estimated from available soil data. Actual elevations and drilledpier lengths, and bearing capacities will be determined by a qualified independent testing
and inspecting agency on excavation. Final evaluations and approval of data will be
determined by EOR and Soil Engineer.
1.
Hardpan-Bearing Drilled Piers: Testing agency will take undisturbed rock core
samples from drilled-pier bottoms; test each sample for compression, moisture
content, and density; and report results and evaluations.
Rock-Bearing Drilled Piers: Testing agency will take undisturbed rock core
samples from drilled-pier bottoms, test each sample for compression, and report
results and evaluations.
2.
D.
BFL OWEN
Concrete: Sampling and testing of concrete for quality control will include the
following:
1.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply
with ASTM C 94.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
Slump: ASTM C 143; 1 test at point of placement for each compressivestrength test, but no less than 1 test for each concrete load.
Air Content:
ASTM C 231, pressure method; 1 test for each
compressive-strength test.
Concrete Temperature:
ASTM C 1064; 1 test hourly when air
temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F
(27 deg C) and above, and 1 test for each set of compressive-strength
specimens.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; 1 set of 4 standard
cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed.
Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens, unless
field-cured test specimens are required.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; 1 set for each drilled pier,
but not more than 1 set for each truck load. One specimen will be tested
at 7 days, 2 specimens will be tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen will be
retained in reserve for later testing if required.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given
class of concrete, testing will be conducted from at least 5 randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of 3
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength
and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength
by more than 250 psi (3.45 MPa).
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 14
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
5.
6.
7.
Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests will
contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement,
name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, concrete type and class, location
of concrete batch in drilled pier, design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type
of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive
device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or
rejection.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency will make additional tests of
concrete when test results indicate concrete strengths or other requirements have
not been met.
a.
E.
3.7
BFL OWEN
Other testing:
Continuous coring of drilled piers may be required, at Contractor's
expense, when temporary casings have not been withdrawn within
specified time limits or where observations of placement operations
indicate deficient concrete quality, presence of voids, segregation, or
other possible defects.
May apply per soil engineer report and recommendations.
DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A.
Remove surplus excavated material and slurry and legally dispose of it off Owner's
property.
END OF SECTION
DRILLED PIERS
02466 - 15
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix
design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B.
Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Foundations and footings.
Slabs-on-grade.
Foundation walls.
Shear walls.
Load-bearing building walls.
Equipment pads and bases.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing
compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Architect.
C.
Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete
reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing
required for openings through concrete structures.
D.
Shop drawings for formwork indicating fabrication and erection of forms for specific
finished concrete surfaces. Show form construction including jointing, special form
joints or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect
exposed concrete visually.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
E.
Architect's review is for general architectural applications and features only.
Designing formwork for structural stability and efficiency is Contractor's
responsibility.
Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, sources, and
descriptions, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Color finishes.
Normal weight aggregates.
Fiber reinforcement.
Reglets.
Waterstops.
Vapor retarder/barrier.
Form liners.
F.
Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.
G.
Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by
Architect. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor,
certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements.
Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with
specification requirements.
H.
1.4
BFL OWEN
Minutes of preinstallation conference.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications,
and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1.
2.
3.
American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete
for Buildings."
ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
B.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency acceptable to Architect to perform
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
C.
Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during
progress of Work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work,
shall be done at Contractor's expense.
D.
Mockup: Cast mockup of size indicated or as required to demonstrate typical joints,
form tie spacing, and proposed surface finish, texture, and color. Maintain sample panel
exposed to view for duration of Project, after Architect's acceptance of visual qualities.
1.
Demolish mockup and remove from site when directed by Architect.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
E.
BFL OWEN
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" and the following:
1.
At least 35 days prior to submitting design mixes, conduct a meeting to review
detailed requirements for preparing concrete design mixes and to determine
procedures for satisfactory concrete operations. Review requirements for
submittals, status of coordinating work, and availability of materials. Establish
preliminary work progress schedule and procedures for materials inspection,
testing, and certifications. Require representatives of each entity directly
concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend conference, including, but not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Contractor's superintendent.
Agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
Agency responsible for field quality control.
Ready-mix concrete producer.
Concrete subcontractor.
Primary admixture manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM MATERIALS
A.
Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or
other acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed
surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to
conform to joint system shown on drawings.
1.
2.
Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "A-C or B-B
High Density Overlaid Concrete Form," Class I.
Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form)
Plywood," Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with
each piece bearing legible inspection trademark.
B.
Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable
material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Forms for Textured Finish Concrete: Units of face design, size, arrangement, and
configuration to match Architect's control sample. Provide solid backing and form
supports to ensure stability of textured form liners.
D.
Forms for Cylindrical Columns and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, or
paper or fiber tubes that will produce smooth surfaces without joint indications. Provide
units with sufficient wall thickness to resist wet concrete loads without deformation.
E.
Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to support
weight of placed concrete without deformation.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.2
F.
Carton Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture-resistance, structurally
sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
G.
Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a
maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain,
or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
H.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties
designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal.
Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) to the plane of
the exposed concrete surface.
1.
Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in
diameter in the concrete surface.
REINFORCING MATERIALS
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M Grade 400), deformed.
B.
Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767 (ASTM A 767M), Class II [2.0 oz. zinc psf
(610 g/sq. m)], hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and bending.
C.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775 (ASTM A 775M).
D.
Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.
E.
Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
F.
Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497.
G.
Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884, Class A.
H.
Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bartype supports complying with CRSI specifications.
1.
2.
2.3
BFL OWEN
For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where
base material will not support chair legs.
For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with
forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or
stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2).
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II or V.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
1.
Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
B.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F. Limit use of Fly Ash not to exceed 25 percent of
Portland cement by weight.
C.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a
single source for exposed concrete.
1.
2.
3.
D.
For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain
substances that cause spalling.
Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to
produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual
service may be used when acceptable to Architect.
Proportion wet mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, using materials to be
used on
Project, to provide normal-weight shotcrete with the following
properties. Proportion dry mixes by field test data methods, using materials to
be used on Project, to provide normal-weight shotcrete with the following
properties:
a. Aggregate Gradation: Gradation No. 1, ACI 506R, with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
maximum aggregate size.
b. Aggregate Gradation: Gradation No. 2, ACI 506R, with 1/2-inch (13-mm)
maximum aggregate size.
c. Aggregate Gradation: Gradation No. 3, ACI 506R, with 3/4-inch (19-mm)
maximum aggregate size.
d. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in
normal-weight wet-mix shotcrete having an air content before pumping of 7
percent with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent.
Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330.
E.
Water: Potable.
F.
Fiber Reinforcement: Polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for secondary
reinforcement of concrete slabs, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, not less than
3/4 inch long.
1.
2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Gilco Fibers, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Durafiber, Durafiber Corp.
Fiberstrand 100, Euclid Chemical Co.
Fibermesh, Fibermesh Co., Div. Synthetic Industries, Inc.
Forta, Forta Corp.
Grace Fibers, W.R. Grace & Co.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
g.
BFL OWEN
Polystrand, Metalcrete Industries
G.
Admixtures, General:
percent chloride ions.
Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1
H.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible
with other required admixtures.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
I.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
1.
2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
J.
Air-Tite, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Air-Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co.
Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace & Co.
MB-VR or Micro-Air, Master Builders, Inc.
Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
Sika AER, Sika Corp.
Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp.
PSI N, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co.
WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co.
Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
Metco W.R., Metalcrete Industries.
Prokrete-N, Prokrete Industries.
Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp.
High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
1.
2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Super P, Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.
Cormix 200, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Co.
WRDA 19 or Daracem, W.R. Grace & Co.
Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
Superslump, Metalcrete Industries.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
g.
h.
K.
2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Q-Set, Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co.
Lubricon NCA, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co.
Daraset, W.R. Grace & Co.
Pozzutec 20, Master Builders, Inc.
Accel-Set, Metalcrete Industries.
Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
1.
2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.4
PSPL, Prokrete Industries.
Sikament 300, Sika Corp.
Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
1.
L.
BFL OWEN
PSI-R Plus, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co.
Daratard-17, W.R. Grace & Co.
Pozzolith R, Master Builders, Inc.
Protard, Prokrete Industries.
Plastiment, Sika Corporation.
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Reglets: Where sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are terminated in reglets,
provide reglets of not less than 0.0217- inch- (0.46-mm-) thick galvanized sheet steel.
Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
B.
Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.0336 inch thick
(0.76 mm) with bent tab anchors. Fill slot with temporary filler or cover face opening to
prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
C.
Waterstops: Provide flat, dumbbell-type or centerbulb-type waterstops at construction
joints and other joints as indicated. Size to suit joints.
D.
Rubber Waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 513.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 7
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
2.
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
E.
BFL OWEN
The Burke Co.
Progress Unlimited.
Williams Products, Inc.
Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572.
1.
2.
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
The Burke Co.
Greenstreak Plastic Products Co.
W.R. Meadows, Inc.
Progress Unlimited.
Schlegel Corp.
Vinylex Corp.
F.
Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand.
G.
Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested
according to ASTM E 154, as follows:
1.
2.
Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils (0.2 mm) thick.
Water-resistant barrier consisting of heavy kraft papers laminated together with
glass-fiber reinforcement and overcoated with black polyethylene on each side.
a.
H.
Vapor Barrier: Premolded seven-ply membrane consisting of reinforced core and carrier
sheet with fortified bitumen layers, protective weathercoating, and plastic antistick sheet.
Water vapor transmission rate of 1 perm when tested according to ASTM E 96, Method
B. Provide manufacturer's recommended mastics and gusset tape.
1.
I.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Moistop by
Fortifiber Corporation.
Product:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sealtight
Premoulded Membrane by W.R. Meadows, Inc.
Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery as
the abrasive aggregate for a nonslip finish, with emery aggregate containing not less than
50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Use material that is
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 8
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture,
and cleaning materials.
J.
Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Packaged dry combination of materials consisting of
portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments, and plasticizing admixture.
Use coloring pigments that are finely ground nonfading mineral oxides interground with
cement. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturers' standards, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Conshake 600 Colortone, Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co.
Floorcron, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Quartz Tuff, Dayton-Superior.
Surflex, Euclid Chemical Co.
Colorundum, A.C. Horn, Inc.
Quartz Plate, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Colorcron, Master Builders, Inc.
Floor Quartz, Metalcrete Industries
Lithochrome Color Hardener, L.M. Scofield Co.
Harcol Redi-Mix, Sonneborn-Chemrex.
Hard Top, Symons Corp.
K.
Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9
oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m), complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
L.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.
1.
2.
3.
M.
Waterproof paper.
Polyethylene film.
Polyethylene-coated burlap.
Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing
compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than
0.55 kg/sq. m when applied at 150 sq. ft./gal (4.9 sq. m/L).
1.
2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
A-H 3 Way Sealer, Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.
Spartan-Cote, The Burke Co.
Conspec #1, Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co.
Sealco 309, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Day-Chem Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 9
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
N.
2.
3.
Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating
of 350 g/L.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Highseal, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
Sealco - VOC, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Safe Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp.
Aqua-Cure, Euclid Chemical Co.
Dress & Seal WB, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Masterkure 100W, Master Builders, Inc.
Vocomp-20, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
Metcure, Metalcrete Industries.
Stontop CS1, Stonhard, Inc.
Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed
concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.
1.
2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
P.
Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co.
Horn Clear Seal, A.C. Horn, Inc.
L&M Cure R, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Masterkure, Master Builders, Inc.
CS-309, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
Seal N Kure, Metalcrete Industries.
Kure-N-Seal, Sonneborn-Chemrex.
Stontop CS2, Stonhard, Inc.
Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.
1.
O.
BFL OWEN
Aquafilm, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
Eucobar, Euclid Chemical Co.
E-Con, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Confilm, Master Builders, Inc.
Waterhold, Metalcrete Industries.
Underlayment Compound:
Free-flowing, self-leveling, pumpable, cement-based
compound for applications from 1 inch (25 mm) thick to feathered edges.
1.
2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 10
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Q.
K-15, Ardex, Inc.
Self-Leveling Wear Topping, W.R. Bonsal Co.
Conflow, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
Corlevel, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
LevelLayer II, Dayton Superior Corp.
Flo-Top, Euclid Chemical Co.
Gyp-Crete, Gyp-Crete Corp.
Levelex, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Underlayment 110, Master Builders, Inc.
Stoncrete UL1, Stonhard, Inc.
Concrete Top, Symons Corp.
Thoro Underlayment Self-Leveling, Thoro System Products.
Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.
1.
2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only):
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
b.
Superior Concrete Bonder, Dayton Superior Corp.
Euco Weld, Euclid Chemical Co.
Weld-Crete, Larsen Products Corp.
Everweld, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Herculox, Metalcrete Industries.
Ready Bond, Symons Corp.
Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
R.
BFL OWEN
Acrylic Bondcrete, The Burke Co.
Strongbond, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
Day-Chem Ad Bond, Dayton Superior Corp.
SBR Latex, Euclid Chemical Co.
Daraweld C, W.R. Grace & Co.
Hornweld, A.C. Horn, Inc.
Everbond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Acryl-Set, Master Builders Inc.
Intralok, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
Acrylpave, Metalcrete Industries.
Sonocrete, Sonneborn-Chemrex.
Stonlock LB2, Stonhard, Inc.
Strong Bond, Symons Corp.
Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or
damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 11
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
2.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.5
BFL OWEN
Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co.
Spec-Bond 100, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
Resi-Bond (J-58), Dayton Superior.
Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620, Euclid Chemical Co.
Epoxtite Binder 2390, A.C. Horn, Inc.
Epabond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc.
Rezi-Weld 1000, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
Metco Hi-Mod Epoxy, Metalcrete Industries.
Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, Sika Corp.
Stonset LV5, Stonhard, Inc.
R-600 Series, Symons Corp.
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES
A.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial
batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method,
use an independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting
proposed mix designs.
1.
2.
Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.
Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 15 percent of cement content by weight.
B.
All proposed mix designs shall be properly prepared and submitted to the EOR for their
approval. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of
concrete at least 21 days prior to start of Work. Back up data per Method-B of Section
1905.2 of CBC shall be submitted . All data shall be prepared by independent testing
agency (other than supplier/manufacturer’s labs). Acceptable data shall be provided from
projects within the last five years. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix
designs have been reviewed by Architect.
C.
Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as
indicated on drawings and schedules:
1. 5000 psi (34.5 MPa), 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.44
maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.35 maximum (air-entrained).
2.
4000 psi (27.6 MPa), 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.44
maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.35 maximum (air-entrained).
3.
4.
3000 psi (20.7 MPa), 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.58
maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.46 maximum (air-entrained).
2500 psi (17.2 MPa), 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.67
maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.54 maximum (air-entrained).
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 12
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
D.
Water-Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum watercement (W/C) ratios as follows:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Subjected to freezing and thawing: W/C 0.45.
Subjected to deicers/watertight: W/C 0.40.
Subjected to brackish water, salt spray, or deicers: W/C 0.40.
Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of
placement as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
BFL OWEN
Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches (75 mm).
Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch (25 mm) and not more than
3 inches (75 mm).
Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer):
Not more than 8 inches (200 mm) after adding admixture to site-verified 2 - 3
inch (50 - 75 mm) slump concrete.
Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches (100 mm).
G.
Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor
when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix
design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using
in Work.
H.
Fiber Reinforcement: Add at manufacturer's recommended rate but not less than 1.5
lb/cu. yd. (0.9 kg/cu. m).
ADMIXTURES
A.
Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer)
in oncrete, as required, for placement and workability.
B.
Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50
deg F (10 deg C).
C.
Use high-range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use
industrial slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be
watertight, and concrete with water-cement ratios below 0.50.
D.
Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at
point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2
percent within the following limits:
1.
Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals,
or hydraulic pressure:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 13
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
E.
2.7
BFL OWEN
4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 5.5 percent (severe exposure) for 1-1/2
inch (38 mm) maximum aggregate.
4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) for 1
inch (25 mm) maximum aggregate.
5.0 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) for 3/4
inch (19 mm) maximum aggregate.
5.5 percent (moderate exposure); 7.0 percent (severe exposure) for 1/2
inch (13 mm) maximum aggregate.
Other concrete not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure, or to
receive a surface hardener: 2 to 4 percent air.
Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict compliance
with manufacturer's directions.
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Job-Site Mixing: Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
For mixers of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2
minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of
batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase
minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76
cu. m).
1.
B.
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating
Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and
amount of water introduced.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 deg F (29 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C),
reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air
temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60
minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
3.2
Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related
materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
FORMS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 14
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
A.
General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can
support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of
correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction
tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits:
1.
2.
3.3
BFL OWEN
Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view.
Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.
B.
Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate
alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for
openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers,
blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the
Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide
backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.
C.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete
surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place
concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets,
recesses, and the like for easy removal.
D.
Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace
temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate
temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
E.
Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber
chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
F.
Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate
work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from
trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into
forms.
G.
Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive
concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing
concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent
mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION
A.
General: Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension
parallel with direction of pour.
B.
Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or
pressure-sensitive tape.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 15
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
3.4
Cover vapor retarder/barrier with sand cushion and compact to depth indicated.
PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for
"Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and
supports and as specified.
1.
3.5
BFL OWEN
Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement
placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that
reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved
by Architect.
D.
Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position
during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete,
not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
JOINTS
A.
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength
or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.
B.
Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) deep in construction joints in walls and
slabs and between walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose
may be used for slabs.
C.
Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement
across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement
through sides of strip placements.
D.
Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete.
E.
Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to
form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Support and protect exposed waterstops
during progress of Work.
Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to
manufacturer's printed instructions.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 16
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
F.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points
of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1.
G.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs-ongrade to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide by onefourth of slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide by one-fourth of slab depth, unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
3.6
BFL OWEN
Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard
strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool
slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts
and clean groove of loose debris.
Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon
as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging
aggregate.
If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 ft. (4.5 m) in either
direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column
centerlines, half bays, third bays).
Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items
required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use
setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to
be attached.
B.
Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive
through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is
shown at lintels, relieving angles, and other conditions.
C.
Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated on drawings.
D.
Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to
achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units
to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
PREPARING FORM SURFACES
A.
General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, formcoating compound before placing reinforcement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 17
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
B.
Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact
with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply
according to manufacturer's instructions.
1.
3.8
BFL OWEN
Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained
steel formwork is not acceptable.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,
reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit
installation of their work.
B.
General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
Placing Concrete," and as specified.
C.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be
placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.
D.
Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper
than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where
placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic
to avoid cold joints.
1.
2.
E.
Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented
by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for
consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible
effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer
and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into
lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration
of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment
of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.
Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous
operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or
section.
1.
2.
3.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.
Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull
floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab
surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 18
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
F.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect
concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,
freezing actions, or low temperatures.
G.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C),
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C)
at point of placement.
1.
2.
H.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality
and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.9
BFL OWEN
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of
placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or
chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of
ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool
concrete is Contractor's option.
Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that
steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before
embedding in concrete.
Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,
low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not
exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the
concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and
defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in height rubbed down or chipped off.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or
a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing,
veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface
obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical
manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other
projections completely removed and smoothed.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 19
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
C.
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth-rubbed finish on scheduled concrete surfaces
that have received smooth-formed finish treatment not later than 1 day after form
removal.
1.
D.
2.
3.10
Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive
until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other
than that created by the rubbing process.
Grout-Cleaned Finish: Provide grout-cleaned finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that
have received smooth-formed finish treatment.
1.
E.
BFL OWEN
Combine one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand by
volume, and a 50:50 mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding
admixture and water to form the consistency of thick paint. Blend standard
portland cement and white portland cement in amounts determined by trial
patches so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.
Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small
holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep
damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture
matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces
uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A.
Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor
topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded
applied cementitious finish flooring material, and where indicated.
1.
B.
After placing slabs, finish surface to tolerances of F(F) 15 (floor flatness) and
F(L) 13 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155
(ASTM E 1155M). Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After
leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.
Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and
other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic
waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated.
1.
After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface
until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only,
when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently
to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with
power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power
units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor
levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M). Cut down
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 20
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately
after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
C.
Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and
slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or
another thin film-finish coating system.
1.
After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel.
Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved
over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation,
free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to
tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness) measured
according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M). Grind smooth any surface
defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
D.
Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thinset mortar, apply a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly
scarifying the surface with a fine broom.
E.
Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms,
steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1.
F.
Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Apply nonslip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads,
platforms, ramps, sloped walks, and where indicated.
1.
2.
G.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming
with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required
final finish with Architect before application.
After completing float finishing and before starting trowel finish, uniformly
spread dampened nonslip aggregate at a rate of 25 lb per 100 sq. ft. (12 kg/10 sq.
m) of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not
force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as
specified.
After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone,
and water to expose nonslip aggregate.
Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Apply a colored wear-resistant finish to monolithic slab
surface indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Apply dry shake materials for the colored wear-resistant finish at a rate of 100 lb
per 100 sq. f
t. (49 kg/10 sq. m), unless a greater amount is recommended by
material manufacturer.
Cast a trial slab approximately 10 ft. (3 m) square to determine actual application
rate, color, and finish, as acceptable to Architect.
Immediately following the first floating operation, uniformly distribute with
mechanical spreader approximately two-thirds of the required weight of the dry
shake material over the concrete surface, and embed by power floating. Follow
floating operation with second shake application, uniformly distributing
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 21
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
4.
3.11
3.12
BFL OWEN
remainder of dry shake material with overlapping applications to ensure uniform
color, and embed by power floating.
After broadcasting and floating, apply a trowel finish as specified. Cure slab
surface with acuring compound recommended by the dry shake material
manufacturer. Apply the curing compound immediately after the final finishing.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by
other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place.
Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide
other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is
still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to
template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer
furnishing machines and equipment.
CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture
loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply
according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before
power floating and troweling.
B.
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after
placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7
days.
C.
Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moistureretaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.
D.
Provide moisture curing by the following methods:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
Use continuous water-fog spray.
Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate
cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide
coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4 inch (100 mm) lap over
adjacent absorptive covers.
Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 22
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
F.
Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete,
placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches
(75 mm) and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any
holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs
as follows:
1.
2.
Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations
are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared).
Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to
manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3
hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage
during curing period.
Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with
finish materials applied directly to concrete.
G.
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,
supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the
full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by
methods specified above, as applicable.
H.
Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and
other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method.
1.
3.13
BFL OWEN
Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-retaining
cover, unless otherwise directed.
SHORES AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory construction, and
as specified.
B.
Extend shoring from ground to roof for structures four stories or less, unless otherwise
permitted.
C.
Extend shoring at least three floors under floor or roof being placed for structures over
four stories. Shore floor directly under floor or roof being placed, so that loads from
construction above will transfer directly to these shores. Space shoring in stories below
this level in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will
induce tensile stress in concrete members where no reinforcing steel is provided. Extend
shores beyond minimums to ensure proper distribution of loads throughout structure.
D.
Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured
concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support work without excessive
stress or deflection.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 23
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
E.
3.14
3.15
3.16
BFL OWEN
Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, or longer, if
required, until concrete has attained its required 28-day strength and heavy loads due to
construction operations have been removed.
REMOVING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls,
columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not
less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is
sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing
and protection operations are maintained.
B.
Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other
structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days or until concrete has
attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days.
Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured
specimens representative of concrete location or members.
C.
Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other
vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without
loosening or disturbing shores and supports.
REUSING FORMS
A.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated,
or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.
Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.
B.
When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces,
remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to
avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as
acceptable to Architect.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar
immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Architect.
B.
Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate
passing a No. 16 mesh (1.2 mm) sieve, using only enough water as required for handling
and placing.
1.
Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch (6 mm) in any dimension,
and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a
depth less than 1 inch (25 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the
concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 24
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.
C.
Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect
the concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the
concrete.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for
smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct
low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of
slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent
has dried.
For surfaces exposed to view, blend white portland cement and standard portland
cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color.
Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly
higher than surrounding surface.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if
defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and
texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other
projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by
cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone
plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
1.
D.
BFL OWEN
Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's
durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch
(0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through
nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock
pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at
least 14 days.
Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing
surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching
mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary
underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1
inch (25 mm) in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.
Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with
at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in
contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete
of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete.
Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in
same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter by
dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of
dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding
compound. Place dry-pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 25
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for
at least 72 hours.
3.17
F.
Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure,
using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.
G.
Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test
reports.
B.
Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the
following, as directed by Architect.
1.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply
with ASTM C 94.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour
of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency
seems to have changed.
Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or
normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal
weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained
concrete.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air
temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C)
and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.
Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard
cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed.
Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except
when field-cured test specimens are required.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour
exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m) plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. (38
cu. m) more than the first 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m) of each concrete class
placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens
tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if
required.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given
class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than five are used.
When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd. (38 cu.
m), Architect may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory
strength is provided.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 26
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
4.
5.
BFL OWEN
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of
three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive
strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 250 psi (3.4 MPa).
C.
Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix
producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength
tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete
placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete
batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and
materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28day tests.
D.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
E.
Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete
when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not
been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct
tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42,
or by other methods as directed.
END OF SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 27
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 03305
CLEANING AND RE-STRIPING OF TRAFFIC SURFACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The following specification standards of the issues listed in this paragraph (including the
amendments, addenda and errata designated), but referred to hereinafter by basic
designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent required by the references
thereto.
B.
Federal Specifications: TT-P-1952B Paint, Traffic and Airfield Marking, Water
Emulsion Base.
C. State of California, Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications.
D.
U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, 1978 (latest edition).
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1.
2.
The detergent washing, oil removal, and pressure rinsing of all traffic surfaces
on levels 1 through 4 of the Northwest and Southwest Parking Structures.
The re-striping (re-painting) all existing parking stalls and traffic markings on
levels 1 through 4 of the Northwest and Southwest Parking structures. All
striping shall be the same as existing except where noted on the "ADA Parking
Plans", on sheets A5.3, A5.4, and A5.5 of the Bid Set.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to General Conditions and Requirements of the
contract.
B.
Product data for all paints, detergents, and other materials to be used under this
section for approval by Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT
A.
Traffic Paint shall be TT-P-1952B, color to match existing. All paint materials shall be
delivered in unbroken original containers bearing the manufacturer's name and data as
required by local ordinances.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
CLEANING AND RE-STRIPING OF TRAFFIC SURFACES
03305-1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.1
3.2
BFL OWEN
GENERAL
A.
Coordinate the cleaning of traffic surfaces and re-striping of parking stalls and traffic
markings with the closure of specific parking decks as per the project phasing plan.
B.
Coordinate cleaning and painting of the traffic surfaces to follow Epoxy Injection of
cracks.
PREPARATION AND CLEANING OF TRAFFIC SURFACES
A.
All traffic surfaces in the Northwest and Southwest Parking Structures are to be
cleaned, including, but not limited to: traffic lanes, parking stalls, ramps,
sidewalks, and curbs.
B.
All surfaces to receive paint shall be free of all substances which will damage or
deteriorate the paint film. Painting and marking shall be done only when the surfaces are
dry and clean and when the weather is not excessively windy, dusty or foggy. New
asphalt concrete shall be allowed to cure at least 21 days before painting.
C. Cleaning of all traffic surfaces shall be as follows:
1. Power sweep entire floor area; blow out all corners and column footings.
2.
Remove oil spots with oil emulsifier and oil absorber materials to remove
oils from below the surface. Detail scrub slab with high pH detergent.
3.
Wet-soak floor for a minimum of thirty minutes by flooding with a hose or
using an automatic scrubber without vacuum or squeegee attachments.
4.
Power scrub the entire floor with automatic scrubber capable of a minimum of
100 lbs. pressure, equipped with nylo-grit brush head or black stripping pad
and high pH detergent.
5. Power rinse slab surface, removing all traces of soap residue.
3.3
STORAGE AND MIXING
A.
The Contractor shall provide his own storage facilities and assume responsibility
for their security. Such storage facilities shall meet the state safety requirements
and the Airport safety requirements and shall be located as directed. All mixing
of paint materials shall be done in the area adjoining
the work and shall be applied when the air temperature is above 50 degrees F to a
clean dry surface.
3.4 ALIGNMENT
A.
The alignment of the proposed stripes shall be determined by spotting with paint in
advance of machine application.
B.
Stripes 25 feet and longer shall be spotted along the center line of the proposed stripe by
locating the spots with either a survey instrument or a rope stretched between established
center line points.
C.
The stripe shall be approximately %2 - inch in diameter. Spotting shall be effected by
marking the pavement surface with narrow paint brush or spraying apparatus at the
CLEANING AND RE-STRIPING OF TRAFFIC SURFACES
03305-2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
survey points or over the top of the rope. Spotting shall be made at intervals of not more
than 10 feet apart.
D.
3.5
Work and symbol markings shall conform to the applicable requirements of the
"Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" unless otherwise indicated.
APPLICATION OF PAINT TO TRAFFIC SURFACE
A.
Paint shall be applied at its original consistency, without the addition of thinner, by
means of stripe painting spray equipment, having at least nozzle to eliminate paint
splatter outside the limit lines.
B.
Spraying device shall be equipped with a dust nozzle to operating ahead of the paint
spray and an agitator which keep the paint thoroughly agitated while it is being applied.
C.
The stripes and markings shall be or the required width, with clean, true edges
without sharp breaks, and shall be applied with 1/2 -inch of the average center line
of the spotted line.
D.
Any deviation to either side of the spotted line that exceeds 1/2-inch in any 50-foot length
shall be obliterated and the stripe corrected.
E.
A uniform covering of paint shall be applied and the finished stripes and markings shall
be free from light spot and skips.
F. Paint shall be applied at the rate of not less than one gallon per 100 square feet.
G.
The Contractor shall provide all warning devices required to protect the painting
operations and the finished work. The Contractor shall repaint, at his own expense, any
portion of the stripe damaged by any type of traffic within 24 hours after the strip has
been applied.
H.
The newly extruded stripes shall be protected from damage, and any traffic stripe
damaged or failing to properly adhere to the surface of the pavement, shall be replaced
with stripe meeting the requirements of these specifications.
END OF SECTION 03305
CLEANING AND RE-STRIPING OF TRAFFIC SURFACES
03305-3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 03361
SHOTCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes shotcrete applied by the wet-mix process.
B.
This Section includes shotcrete applied by the dry-mix process.
C.
This Section includes shotcrete applied by either the wet- or dry-mix process.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Shotcrete: Mortar or concrete pneumatically projected onto a surface at high velocity.
B.
Dry-Mix Shotcrete: Shotcrete with most of the water added at nozzle.
C.
Wet-Mix Shotcrete: Shotcrete with ingredients, including mixing water, mixed before
introduction into delivery hose. Accelerator, if used, is normally added at nozzle.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data and instructions for manufactured materials and products including
reinforcement and forming accessories, shotcrete materials, admixtures, curing
compounds, and others requested by Architect.
C.
Shop Drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing shotcrete
reinforcement. Include support and anchor details, number and location of splices, and
special reinforcing required for openings through shotcrete structures.
D.
Samples of materials requested by Architect, including names, sources, and descriptions.
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.5
BFL OWEN
E.
Design reference sample for initial selection, approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300
by 300 by 50 mm), to illustrate quality of finishes, colors, and textures of exposed
surfaces of shotcrete.
F.
Design mixes for each shotcrete mix.
G.
Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance of shotcrete with requirements indicated.
H.
Material certificates in lieu of agency test reports, when permitted by Architect, signed
by manufacturer certifying that each material item complies with requirements.
I.
Nozzle-operator certifications according to ACI 506.3R.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed shotcrete
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
1.
2.
Nozzle operators must be certified according to ACI 506.3R, "Guide to
Certification of Shotcrete Nozzlemen."
Nozzle operators must attain a test-panel mean core grade of 2.5 or less
according to ACI 506.2 on preconstruction tests.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency
must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted
criteria conforming to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329, that it has the experience and
capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work.
C.
Comply with provisions of the following, except where more stringent requirements are
indicated:
1.
2.
3.
D.
American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete
for Buildings."
ACI 506.2, "Specification for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of
Shotcrete."
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
Preconstruction Testing: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent
testing agency to perform the preconstruction tests and inspections indicated.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency
to perform preconstruction tests and inspections indicated.
Produce test panels before shotcrete placement according to requirements of
ACI 506.2 and ASTM C 1140 for each design mix, shooting orientation, and
each nozzle operator. Produce test panels with dimensions of 30 by 30 inches
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
(760 by 760 mm) minimum and of average thickness of shotcrete, but not less
than 3 inches (76 mm). From each test panel, obtain 6 test specimens; 1 set of 3
specimens reinforced and 1 set of 3 specimens unreinforced.
a.
b.
E.
Mockups: Prior to installing shotcrete, construct mockups for each finish required and
for each design mix, shooting orientation, and nozzle operator. Build mockups to
comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not
indicated, as directed by Architect.
Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as
a standard for judging the completed Work.
a.
b.
1.6
Test each set of unreinforced specimens for compressive strength
according to ASTM C 42.
Visually inspect each set of reinforced shotcrete cores taken from test
panels and determine mean core grades according to ACI 506.2.
When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of
Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Cold-Weather Shotcreting: Protect shotcrete work from physical damage or reduced
strength caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures according to ACI 306R and as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Discontinue shotcreting when ambient temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and
falling. Uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a shotcrete
shooting temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 90
deg F (32 deg C).
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
Do not place shotcrete on frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frozen
materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze
agents.
Hot-Weather Shotcreting: Mix, place, and protect shotcrete according to ACI 305R
when hot-weather conditions and high temperatures would seriously impair quality and
strength of shotcrete and as follows:
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
2.
BFL OWEN
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain shotcrete temperature at time of
placement below 90 deg F (32 deg C) for wet mix; 100 deg F (38 deg C) for dry
mix.
Lower temperature of reinforcing steel and receiving surfaces below 100 deg F
(38 deg C) before shotcreting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
FORM MATERIALS
A.
Forms for Exposed-Finish Shotcrete: Plywood, metal, or similar panel-type materials.
Provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable
sizes to minimize number of joints.
B.
Forms for Unexposed-Finish Shotcrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or similar materials.
Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and 1 side for tight fit.
REINFORCING MATERIALS
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M, Grade 400), deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars:
Grade 400).
ASTM A 706, Grade 60 (ASTM A 706M,
C.
Galvanized Reinforcing Bars:
ASTM A 767 (ASTM A 767M), Class II, hot-dip
galvanized with 2-oz./sq. ft. (610-g/sq. m) zinc.
D.
Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold drawn.
E.
Steel-Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, plain, cold drawn.
F.
Deformed-Steel-Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, cold drawn.
G.
Reinforcement Support: Provide bolsters, chairs, spacers, ties, and other devices for
spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing against wood forms, complying with CRSI
recommendations.
1.
H.
For exposed-to-view shotcrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact
with removable forms, provide supports with legs protected with plastic (CRSI,
Class 1) or stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2).
Reinforcement Anchors: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), unheaded rods or ASTM A 307,
Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6), headed bolts; carbon-steel, hex-head bolts;
and carbon-steel nuts.
1.
Finish: Plain, uncoated.
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.
2.3
Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.
SHOTCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, Low Alkali.
1.
2.4
BFL OWEN
Use only one brand and type of cement for Project, unless otherwise acceptable
to Architect.
B.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F.
C.
Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
D.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S. Provide aggregates from a single
source.
E.
Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330.
F.
Coloring Agent: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored, waterreducing admixtures; nonfading and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
G.
Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or
strength of concrete.
H.
Steel Fiber: ASTM C 1116, Type 1, carbon-steel fiber and ASTM A 820, Type 1, colddrawn wire, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) long.
I.
Synthetic Fiber:
Polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for secondary
reinforcement of shotcrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, not less than 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) long.
J.
Ground Wire: High-strength steel wire, 0.8 to 1 mm in diameter.
CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
A.
General: ASTM C 1141, Class A or Class B, but limited to the following admixture
materials. Provide admixtures for shotcrete that contain not more than 0.1 percent
chloride ions.
1.
Certify compatibility of admixtures with other cementitious materials.
B.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible
with other required shotcrete admixtures.
C.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
D.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.5
E.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
G.
Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type C.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Sheet Materials: ASTM C 171, curing paper, polyethylene film, or white-burlap
polyethylene sheet; nonstaining.
B.
Clear, Solvent-Borne, Liquid, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,
Type 1, Class A or Class B, wax free.
C.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
Class B.
1.
2.6
ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Provide material with maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350
g/L.
SHOTCRETE MIXES, GENERAL
A.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of shotcrete.
1.
2.7
BFL OWEN
Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to not exceed, in combination, 25 percent of
portland cement by weight.
B.
Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement or
cementitious material permitted by ACI 301.
C.
Other Admixtures: When included in shotcrete design mixes, use water-reducing, highrange water-reducing, water-reducing and accelerating, or water-reducing and retarding
admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Fiber Reinforcement: Include fiber reinforcement at manufacturer's recommended rate,
but not less than rate required by shotcrete design mix.
E.
Design Mix Adjustments: Subject to compliance with requirements, design mix
adjustments may be proposed when characteristics of materials, project conditions,
weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.
NORMAL-WEIGHT SHOTCRETE MIXES
A.
Proportion wet mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, using materials to be used on
Project, to provide normal-weight shotcrete with the following properties:
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
B.
Proportion dry mixes by field test data methods, using materials to be used on Project, to
provide normal-weight shotcrete with the following properties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.9
Compressive Strength (28 Day): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa), unless noted otherwise.
Aggregate Gradation: Gradation No. 1, ACI 506R, with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
maximum aggregate size.
Aggregate Gradation: Gradation No. 2, ACI 506R, with 1/2-inch (13-mm)
maximum aggregate size.
Aggregate Gradation: Gradation No. 3, ACI 506R, with 3/4-inch (19-mm)
maximum aggregate size.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in
normal-weight wet-mix shotcrete having an air content before pumping of 7
percent with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent.
SHOTCRETE EQUIPMENT
A.
Mixing Equipment: Capable of thoroughly mixing shotcrete materials in sufficient
quantities to maintain continuous placement.
B.
Wet-Mix Delivery Equipment: Capable of discharging aggregate-cement-water mixture
accurately, uniformly, and continuously.
C.
Dry-Mix Delivery Equipment: Capable of discharging aggregate-cement mixture into
delivery hose under close control and maintaining continuous stream of uniformly mixed
material at required velocity to discharge nozzle. Equip discharge nozzle with manually
operated water-injection system for directing even distribution of water to aggregatecement mixture.
1.
2.
2.10
BFL OWEN
Provide uniform, steady supply of clean, compressed air to maintain constant
nozzle velocity while simultaneously operating blow pipe for cleaning away
rebound.
Provide water supply with uniform pressure at discharge nozzle to ensure
uniform mixing with aggregate-cement mix. Provide water pump to system if
line water pressure is inadequate.
BATCHING AND MIXING
A.
Wet-Mix Process: Measure mix proportions by weight batching according to
ASTM C 94. Mix and deliver ready-mix shotcrete material according to ASTM C 94.
1.
B.
Comply with ASTM C 685 when shotcrete ingredients are delivered dry and
proportioned and mixed on-site.
Dry-Mix Process:
Measure mix proportions by weight batching according to
ASTM C 94 or by volume batching complying with ASTM C 685 requirements.
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 7
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
2.
BFL OWEN
In volume batching, adjust fine-aggregate volume for bulking. Test fineaggregate moisture content at least once daily to determine extent of bulking.
Prepackaged shotcrete materials may be used at Contractor's option. Predampen
prepackaged shotcrete materials and mix before use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Concrete or Masonry: Before applying shotcrete, remove unsound or loose material and
contaminants that may inhibit shotcrete bonding. Chip or scarify areas to be repaired to
extent necessary to provide sound substrate. Taper edges to eliminate square shoulders
at perimeter of cavity. Dampen surfaces before shotcreting.
1.
3.2
Abrasive blast existing surfaces that do not require chipping to remove paint, oil,
grease, or other contaminants and to provide roughened surface for proper
bonding of shotcrete.
B.
Earth: Compact and trim to line and grade before placing shotcrete. Do not place
shotcrete on frozen surfaces. Dampen surfaces before shotcreting.
C.
Rock: Clean rock surfaces of loose material, mud, and other foreign matter that weakens
bonding of shotcrete.
D.
Steel: Clean steel surfaces by abrasive blasting, SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning."
FORMS
A.
General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain forms to support construction loads.
Construct forms so shotcrete members and structures are secured to prevent excessive
vibration or deflection during shotcreting.
1.
2.
B.
Fabricate forms to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to
shotcrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
Construct forms to required sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions using ground
wires and depth gages to obtain accurate alignment, location, and grades in
finished structures. Construct forms to prevent mortar leakage but permit escape
of air and rebound during shotcreting. Provide for openings, offsets, blocking,
screeds, anchorages, inserts, and other features required in Work.
Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in shotcrete forms to accommodate work
of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from
trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into
forms.
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 8
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.3
3.4
PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing,
and supporting reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that
weaken bonding of shotcrete.
C.
Securely embed reinforcement anchors into existing substrates, located as required.
D.
Accurately position, support, and rigidly secure reinforcement against displacement by
formwork, construction, or shotcreting. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,
runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.
E.
Place reinforcement to obtain minimum coverages for shotcrete protection. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
shotcreting. Set wire ties with ends directed into shotcrete, not toward exposed shotcrete
surfaces.
F.
Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
JOINTS
A.
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints tapered to a 1:1 slope where
joint is not subject to compression loads and square where joint is perpendicular to main
reinforcement. Continue reinforcement through construction joints, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Control or Contraction Joints: Construct control or contraction joints in shotcrete using
saw cuts 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) by-1/3 slab depth or premolded plastic, hardboard, or
fiberboard strip inserts 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) wide-by-1/3 shotcrete depth, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
BFL OWEN
After shotcrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris.
Provide joints not exceeding 15 feet (4.5 m) in either direction.
Tool edges round on each side of insert when floated or troweled finishes are
required.
ALIGNMENT CONTROL
A.
Ground Wires: Install ground wires to establish thickness and planes of required
shotcrete surfaces. Install ground wires at corners and offsets not established by forms.
Pull ground wires taut and position adjustment devices to permit additional tightening.
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 9
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.6
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
3.7
BFL OWEN
General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required
for other work attached to or supported by shotcrete. Use Setting Drawings, diagrams,
instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply temporary protective coverings and protect adjacent surfaces against deposit of
rebound and overspray or impact from nozzle stream.
B.
Moisten wood forms immediately before placing shotcrete where form coatings are not
used.
C.
Apply shotcrete according to ACI 506.2 and as follows:
1.
2.
D.
Deposit shotcrete continuously in multiple passes, to required thickness, without cold
joints and laminations developing.
1.
2.
E.
Apply dry-mix shotcrete material within 45 minutes after predampening.
Apply wet-mix shotcrete material within 90 minutes after batching.
Place shotcrete with nozzle held perpendicular to receiving surface.
Place shotcrete in corners and recesses first.
Place shotcrete to completely encase reinforcing and other embedded items. Maintain
front face of reinforcing free of build-up during encasement.
1.
Maintain reinforcing in position during shotcrete placement operations.
F.
Do not place subsequent lifts until previous lift of shotcrete is capable of supporting new
shotcrete.
G.
Do not permit shotcrete to sag, slough, or dislodge.
H.
Remove hardened overspray, rebound, and laitance from shotcrete surfaces to receive
additional layers of shotcrete; and dampen surfaces.
I.
Do not disturb shotcrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations.
J.
Remove ground wires or other alignment control devices after shotcrete placement.
K.
Shotcrete Core Grade: Apply shotcrete to achieve a mean core grade of 2.5 or less
according to ACI 506.2, with no core exceeding Grade 3.
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 10
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.8
L.
Installation Tolerances: Place gun-finished shotcrete without exceeding installation
tolerances permitted by ACI 117R, increased by a factor of 2.
M.
Installation Tolerances: Place shotcrete without exceeding installation tolerances
permitted by ACI 117R, increased by a factor of 1.5.
SURFACE FINISHES
A.
Gun Finish: Textured, uneven, natural gun finish to exposed surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Rod Finish: Rough-textured finish obtained by cutting or screeding exposed face of
shotcrete to required plane by rod or straightedge after initial set.
C.
Broom Finish: Rough-textured broom finish obtained by screeding exposed face of
shotcrete to required plane by rod, cutting screed, or trowel and brooming after initial
set.
D.
Flash-Coat Finish: After screeding to rod finish, apply up to 1/4-inch (6-mm) coat of
shotcrete using ACI 506R, No. 1 gradation, fine-screened sand modified with maximum
aggregate size not exceeding No. 4 (4.75 mm) to provide a finely textured finish.
E.
Flash Coat: After screeding to natural rod finish, apply up to 1/4-inch (6-mm) coat of
shotcrete using ACI 506R, No. 1 gradation, fine-screened sand modified with maximum
aggregate size not exceeding No. 4 (4.75 mm) and finish as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Finish:
Finish:
Finish:
Finish:
Wood-float, granular-textured finish.
Rubber-float, coarse-textured finish.
Hairbrush-float, fine-textured, sandy finish.
Steel-trowel, smooth, hard finish.
F.
Finish-Coat Finish: After screeding to natural rod finish, apply shotcrete finish coat, 1/4
to 1 inch (6 to 25 mm) thick, using ACI 506R, No. 1 gradation, fine-screened sand
modified with maximum aggregate size not exceeding No. 4 (4.75 mm) to provide a
finish of uniform texture and appearance.
G.
Finish Coat: After screeding to natural rod finish, apply shotcrete finish coat, 1/4 to 1
inch (6 to 25 mm) thick, using ACI 506R, No. 1 gradation, fine-screened sand modified
with maximum aggregate size not exceeding No. 4 (4.75 mm) and finish as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.9
BFL OWEN
Finish:
Finish:
Finish:
Finish:
Wood-float, granular-textured finish.
Rubber-float, coarse-textured finish.
Hairbrush-float, fine-textured, sandy finish.
Steel-trowel, smooth, hard finish.
CURING
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 11
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
A.
Protect freshly placed shotcrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B.
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from shotcrete surface after
placing and finishing.
C.
Curing Exposed Surfaces: Cure shotcrete by the following methods:
1.
2.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for at least 7 days with
water, continuous water-fog spray, or water-saturated absorptive covers with
sides and ends lapped and sealed.
Curing Compound: Apply curing compound uniformly in continuous operation
by power spray according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
a.
D.
3.10
Apply curing compound to natural- or gun-finished shotcrete at rate of 1
gal./100 sq. ft. (1 L/2.5 sq. m).
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed shotcrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in
place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue
curing by methods specified above, as applicable.
FORM REMOVAL
A.
Forms not supporting weight of concrete may be removed after curing at not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 24 consecutive hours after gunning, provided shotcrete is
sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and
protecting operations are maintained.
1.
2.
B.
3.11
BFL OWEN
Forms supporting weight of concrete may not be removed in less than 14 days
and until shotcrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28
days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place shotcrete by testing
field-cured specimens representative of shotcrete location or members.
Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and
other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal without loosening
or disturbing shores and supports.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material is unacceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample materials, visually
grade cores, perform tests, and submit reports during shotcreting.
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 12
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.12
B.
Engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample materials, visually grade cores,
perform tests, and submit reports during shotcreting.
C.
Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method or ASTM C 231, pressure method; one
test for each compressive-strength test for each mix of air-entrained wet-mix shotcrete
measured before pumping.
D.
Shotcrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; 1 test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
(4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and 1 test for each set of
compressive-strength specimens.
E.
Pre-Construction Testing shall be performed in accordance with Item F below. A
minimum of two test panels shall be made. Both test panels shall be tested and meet
project requirements.
F.
Test Panels: Make a test panel, reinforced as in structure, for each design mix and for
each workday or for every 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) of shotcrete placed, whichever is less.
Produce test panels with dimensions of 30 by 30 inches (760 by 760 mm) minimum and
of average thickness of shotcrete, but not less than 3 inches (76 mm). From each test
panel, obtain 6 test specimens; 1 set of 3 specimens reinforced and 1 set of 3 specimens
unreinforced. Test unreinforced specimens for compressive strength from each test
panel according to ASTM C 1140 and construction testing requirements of ACI 506.2.
G.
In-Place Shotcrete: Take a set of 3 unreinforced cores for each mix and for each
workday or for every 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) of shotcrete placed, whichever is less. Test
cores for compressive strength according to ACI 506.2 and ASTM C 42. Do not cut
steel reinforcement. Repair core holes according to ACI 301.
H.
Strength of shotcrete will be considered satisfactory when the mean compressive strength
of each set of 3 unreinforced cores equals or exceeds 85 percent of the specified
compressive strength, with no individual core less than 75 percent of the specified
compressive strength.
I.
Visually inspect each set of 3 reinforced shotcrete cores taken from test panels and
determine mean core grades according to ACI 506.2.
REPAIR OF DEFECTS
A.
3.13
BFL OWEN
Remove and replace shotcrete that is delaminated or exhibits laminations, voids, or
sand/rock pockets exceeding limits for specified core grade of shotcrete.
CLEANING
A.
Remove rebound and overspray materials from final shotcrete surfaces and areas not
intended for shotcrete placement.
END OF SECTION 03361
SHOTCRETE
03361 - 13
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 03600
EPOXY ADHESIVE AND EXPANSION ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and
Requirements and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies the following:
1.
1.3
Fastening bolts into concrete and masonry walls.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Section 03300 – Cast-in-place Concrete
Section 04810 – Unit Masonry Assemblies
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications and
standards:
1.
ASTM C881-90 Standard Specifications for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems
for Concrete and Masonry
2.
ASTM E488-90 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and
Masonry Elements
3.
ASTM D1652 Test Method for Epoxy Content of Epoxy Resins
4.
ASTM D2393 Test Methods for Viscosity of Epoxy-Resins and Related
Compounds
5.
AISI 1008 Cold Rolled Steel, ASTM A563 Grade A, AISI 1008/1010 Cold Rolled
Steel, ASTM A153, Class C
6.
Simpson Epoxy-Tie SET; ICC ESR-177
For installation in fully grouted CMU.
7.
Hilti HIT RE-500 Adhesive System; ICC ESR-2322.
EPOXY ADHESIVE AND EXPANSION ANCHORS
03600 - 1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
8.
B.
BFL OWEN
For installation in Concrete.
Covert CIA Epoxy; ICBO #4846.
9.
ITW Red Head Trubolt+; ICC ESR-2427.
For installation in concrete.
10.
Simpson Sleeve Anchors; ICC ESR-1396.
For installation in fully grouted CMU.
11.
Hilti TZ Bolt, ICC ESR-1917.
For installation in concrete.
12.
Hilti Kwik Bolt-III, ICC ESR 1385.
For installation in fully grouted CMU.
Handling, shipping, storage, and installation shall be done by trained personnel per
Manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE
A.
Epoxy and Expansion Anchors shall conform to manufacturer’s specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.3
INSTALLATION OF EPOXY ADHESIVE ANCHORS TO CONCRETE AND MASONRY
A.
Drill hole to the specified diameter and depth.
B.
Clean and remove dust from hole with oil-free compressed air and wire brush.
C.
Dispense uniform mixed two parts epoxy-resin into the cleaned hole half full, or as per
manufacturer’s requirements.
C.
Insert clean and oil-free anchor into the hole and turn the anchor slowly until the anchor
hits the bottom of the hole, or as per manufacturer’s requirements. Do not disturb during
set time.
INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION ANCHORS TO CONCRETE AND MASONRY
A.
Drill hole to the specified diameter and depth.
B.
Clean and remove dust from hole by blowing compressed air into the hole and using a
wire brush.
C.
Drive anchor into the hole until washer and nut are tight against the surface.
D.
Tighten nut finger tight to required torque setting.
EPOXY ADHESIVE AND EXPANSION ANCHORS
03600 - 2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.4
BFL OWEN
TESTING
Testing shall be performed based on ICBO report on approved manufacturers. As a minimum, 10% of all
the epoxy anchors shall be tested to 200% of their allowable tensile load as listed
in ICBO report. Should more than 10% of tested anchors fail, minimum of 30%
of the remaining dowels shall be tested for the rest of the work on that
area/component. Additional testing may be required per field conditions and the
quality of work to the satisfaction of the EOR.
END OF SECTION 03600
EPOXY ADHESIVE AND EXPANSION ANCHORS
03600 - 3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 03610
EPOXY RESIN INJECTION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and
Requirements and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies the following:
1.
1.3
Repairing cracks in bricks, masonry or concrete.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Section 03300 – Cast-in-place Concrete
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications and
standards:
1.
ASTM C881-90 Standard Specifications for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems
for Concrete and Masonry
2.
ASTM D1652 Test Method for Epoxy Content of Epoxy Resins
3
ASTM D2393 Test Methods for Viscosity of Epoxy-Resins and Related
Compounds
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE
B.
Epoxy Adhesive
CONCRETE REHABILITATION
03730-4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
The systems covered by this specification shall be furnished in two components for combining
immediately prior to use in accordance with written instructions of the formulator. Component A
shall contain a bisphenol-A, epichlorohydrin epoxy resin with or without a reactive diluent.
Component B shall contain one or more curing agents, which on mixing with Component A will
cause the mixture to harden. A suitable inert filler may be uniformly incorporated in one or both
components. The filler shall be either nonsettling or readily dispersible in any component in which it
is incorporated. All systems will cure under humid conditions.
2.2
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
A.
The epoxy resin constituent of Component A shall have an epoxy equivalent of 160 to
275 g/g mol.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.2
INJECTION EPOXY TO REPAIR CRACKS IN CONCRETE AND MASONRY
A.
Clean cracks in accordance with injection adhesive manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Clean surfaces adjacent to cracks or other areas of application from any foreign matter
detrimental to bond or epoxy injection surface seal system. Acids and corrosives are not
permitted fro cleaning, unless neutralized prior to injecting epoxy.
C.
Apply specified surface seal adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions to designated crack face prior to adhesive injection.
D.
Surface seal crack to prevent escape of injection adhesive.
E.
Establish openings for adhesive entry in surface seal along crack.
1.
2.
F.
Adhesive applicator: Determine space between entry ports. Maximum spacing to
be equal to thickness of concrete member.
Backfilled walls: Space entry ports closer together and adjust injecting pressure
so that minimum amount of injection adhesive is lost through the backside at
locations where: a) cracks extend entirely through wall; b) walls have backfill on
one side; c) impossible to achieve access behind wall to seal both crack surfaces.
Start adhesive injection into each crack at lowest elevation entry port.
G.
Repair cracks ranging from 1/64 inch to 3/16 inch wide with low viscosity epoxy which
conforms to ASTM C881 Type I & II, Grade I, Classes B & C.
H.
Repair cracks ranging from 3/32 inch to 3/16 inch wide with medium viscosity gel which
conforms to ASTM C881, Type I & II, Grade 3, Classes B & C.
CONCRETE REHABILITATION
03730-5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
I.
When cracks are completely filled, cure epoxy adhesive for sufficient time to allow surface
seal removal without draining or runback of epoxy material from cracks.
J.
Remove surface seal from cured injection adhesive.
K.
Finish crack face flush with adjacent concrete.
L.
Indentations or protrusions caused by placement of entry ports shall be repaired by
patching as above or grinding.
M.
Remove surface seal material and injection adhesive runs or spills from concrete
surfaces.
END OF SECTION 03610
CONCRETE REHABILITATION
03730-6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 03730
CONCRETE REHABILITATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Supply and application of epoxy resin adhesive for:
1. Pressure injection of cracks.
2. Grouting of cracks by gravity flow.
3. Repair of spalling concrete.
1.02
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B.
Submit manufacturer's product literature and application procedures which, when
approved, shall become basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting work performed.
C.
Submit laboratory test reports or approvals indicating conformance with the
Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Continuous inspection of epoxy repair procedures shall be maintained by a specially
qualified inspector (in accordance with Title 24, Part 2, Section 2312(b)&(k), CCR).
B.
Inspection shall be made by a representative of a Testing Laboratory selected by the
District. The District will pay for inspection costs. Contractor shall notify the
Laboratory 24 hours in advance of time epoxy is to be mixed, and shall promptly notify
the Laboratory of postponement or cancellation of mixing. Contractor shall reimburse
the District for costs incurred resulting from failure to give adequate notification of
postponement or cancellation.
C.
Application of epoxy resin adhesive and concrete repair shall be by a Contractor or
applicator approved by manufacturer.
D. Epoxy resin adhesive shall be product of manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in
manufacture of this type of product for at least 10 years. Manufacturer shall supply references of at
least 5 satisfactory projects for which epoxy resin adhesive treatment was provided.
E.
1.04
Guarantee: Manufacturer and approved Contractor, or applicator, shall provide the
District's Structural Engineer with individual and joint guarantees for materials and
workmanship.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
CONCRETE REHABILITATION
03730-1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.05
BFL OWEN
A.
Deliver materials to jobsite in manufacturer's
manufacturer's name and product identification.
unopened
B.
Store and condition materials as recommended by manufacturer.
containers
bearing
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Materials shall not be applied during existing or impending freezing or inclement
weather.
B.
Adjacent surfaces, to the areas receiving treatment, shall be protected from damage from
equipment, tools or materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURER
A.
For purpose of establishing acceptable criteria for treatment of cracks and repairs of
spalling concrete in concrete walls, slabs and concrete block walls, products of the
following manufacturers considered satisfactory:
1.
2.
3.
2.02
PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE
A.
2.03
Sika Corporation, Santa Fe Springs, California. Telephone: (310) 941-0231.
Fosroc Inc., Woodland, California. Telephone: (916) 686-3633.
The Euclid Chemical Co., Trabuco Canyon, California. Telephone: (714) 6657969.
Properties of mixed epoxy resin adhesive for pressure injection and gravity flow grouting
shall comply with all requirements of applicable American Standards for Testing and
Materials (ASTM).
MATERIALS
A.
Epoxy resin adhesive for pressure injection and gravity flow grouting of cracks:
1.
2.
3.
Modified epoxy resin containing suitable viscosity control agents and
accelerators.
Material shall not contain asbestos.
Material shall be approved by the United States Department of Agriculture.
B. Epoxy Resin Adhesives:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod LV, by Sika Corporation.
Nitobond ULV, by Fosroc Inc.
Euco #452 LV System, Euclid Chemical Company.
Materials for repairing spalling concrete shall be as follows:
CONCRETE REHABILITATION
03730-2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
2.
BFL OWEN
Surface Seal Paste: Sika Top/110 Armatec; Nitoprime Zincrich; Euco Zinc
Prime.
Patching Material: Sika Top 123 Gel; Renderoc HB; Euco Verticoat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Surface adjacent to cracks and spalled concrete must be clean and sound; cracks shall be
free of standing water and frost. Remove dust, grease, foreign particles and disintegrated
materials from surface adjacent to cracks and spalled concrete by sandblasting, highpressure water blasting, grinding, chipping or abrasive wheel.
B.
For gravity flow grouting vee notch surface of crack, to a maximum width of 1/4" and
remove loose debris. Where accessibility to underside of slab is available seal all visible
cracks with epoxy resin adhesive paste or Portland cement based quicksetting compound,
to hold adhesive until cured.
C.
Remove broken and spalled concrete to sound concrete base. Remove concrete to a
depth of 1" minimum around steel reinforced bars. Clean steel bars by sand blasting.
APPLICATION
A.
For manual application of epoxy resin mix only that quantity of material that can be used
in 20 to 30 minutes at 73 
F. For automated application (pressure injection only )
portable unit shall be equipped with positive displacement type pumps, airpowered or
electric, with interlock for positive ratio control of exact proportions of material at
nozzle. Pumps shall provide in-line mixing and metering system and contain drain-back
plugs.
B.
Placement Procedure:
1.
Pressure Injection: To seal cracks, set porting devices as required by
manufacturer. Spacing shall not exceed thickness of substrate and shall be
accomplished to achieve travel of material for grouting between ports; fill
cracks to maximum. On structures accessible on both sides, provide
porting devices on opposite sides at staggered elevations. Apply mixed
epoxy resin adhesive for sealing, over cracks and around each porting
device, to provide an adequate seal to prevent escape of adhesive for
injection grouting. Where required by the Engineer, apply adhesive for
sealing in such a manner that minimal defacing or discoloration of
substrate shall result.
2.
C.
Gravity Flow Grouting: Place mixed material into vee notches and replenish
reservoir with material until cracks are completely filled.
If penetration of any crack is impossible, consult with the Engineer before discontinuing
injection or grouting procedures. If modification of procedure is required to fill cracks
submit proposed modification to the Engineer for approval before proceeding.
CONCRETE REHABILITATION
03730-3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
D.
3.03
BFL OWEN
Install materials for repair of spalling concrete in accordance with the manufacturers
printed instructions.
CLEANING
A.
After curing, material for sealing and porting devices shall be removed mechanically as
directed by the Engineer. Uncured material may be cleaned from tools with an approved
solvent.
B.
Leave work area in clean condition with no evidence of spillovers onto adjacent areas.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE REHABILITATION
03730-4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 03750
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FIBER REINFORCEMENT POLYMER (FRP) COMPOSITE
SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
This specification defines the requirements of structural strengthening of the existing
concrete components using fiber reinforced polymer (FRP) composite system.
B.
The contractor or sub-contractor shall furnish all materials, tools, equipment,
transportation. necessary storage, labor, and supervision required for the application
of the composite system.
C. Section Includes:
1.
Installation of externally bonded fiber reinforced polymer (FRP) composite
laminate to reinforce concrete columns.
2. Work Including:
a)
Inspection of the structural members specified to be reinforced with
FRP on the contract drawings. Inspection shall check the location
and inspect cracks and existing conditions of the concrete substrate.
b)
Furnishing of materials, labor, equipment, transportation, necessary
storage, access, and all items necessary for repair of concrete members
and strengthening by the application of externally bonded FRP
reinforcement as specified on the contract drawings and
specifications, complete.
c)
Cooperation and coordination with all other trades in executing the
work described in the contract.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related Sections:
Section:
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
1. Division 1 Section “General Requirements”, Material & Equipment
2.
Division 2 Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.3 REFERENCES
A. General:
1.
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
2.
Where a date is given for reference standards, or where no date is given for reference
standards, the latest edition available on the date of Notice Inviting Bids shall be used.
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. 318-95
2.
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
ACI 440.2R-02 Guide for the Design and Construction of Externally Bonded
FRP
Systems for Strengthening Concrete Structures.
3. 503R-93
4.
Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete
515R-85
Guide to the Use of Waterproofing, Dampproofing, Protective,
Decorative Barrier Systems for Concrete
5. 546R-96
C.
Concrete Repair Guide
ICC Documents:
1.
AC125 (2001)
2.
AC178 (2001)
Acceptance Criteria for Concrete and Reinforced and Unreinforced
Masonry Strengthening Using Fiber-Reinforced Polymer (FRP),
Composite Systems.
Acceptance Criteria for Inspection and Verification of Concrete and
Reinforced and Un-reinforced Masonry Strengthening Using Fiber
Reinforced Polymer Composite Systems.
D. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI):
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
1.
#03730
Guide for Surface Preparation for the Repair of Deteriorated
Concrete Resulting from Reinforcing Steel Corrosion
2.
#03732
Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for
Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays
3.
#03733
Guide for Selecting and Specifying Materials for Repairs of
Concrete Surfaces
E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. D 3039-1995a Test Method for Tensile Properties of Fiber Resin Composites
2.
D 4541-1998
Standard Test Method for Pull-off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Tester
3.
D 3528-92
Test Method for Strength Properties of Adhesives in Shear by
Tension Loading of Single Lap Joint Laminated Assemblies
4.
E 84-94
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualifications – Provide required evidence of qualification per Section 3075-1.5.
B.
Product Information
1. Approved ICC Evaluation Report number in the name of the system and system’s
manufacturer. Products without a current ICC Evaluation report may be used with the
approval of the City Building Official and EOR.
2. Manufacturer’s product data sheets indicating physical, mechanical, and chemical
characteristics of the materials used in the FRP system showing compliance with the
project requirements. Mechanical characteristics should be reported as Minimum
Acceptable or Guaranteed Values.
3. FRP System Design Properties per Section 2.01-C.6 and Certificate and warranty that
FRP System’s properties will satisfy the minimum “Design Properties” for 25 years from
date of installation of the FRP System.
4. Data and results on material testing including system environmental durability testing
(such as by the Aerospace Corporation), and large-scale structural testing of beams,
columns, or walls, similar to the FRP application in this project.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
5. Manufacturer's recommended surface preparation.
6. Independent test report showing system durability on the proposed composite to be used;
including 10,000 hour resistance to fresh water, salt water, 140 degrees F., alkali soil,
and 100% humidity.
7. Large-scale test results (comparable in dimension, minimum 40% scale, to the project
elements). All tests shall be conducted and reported by an independent testing laboratory.
8. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) level test results of all components of the epoxy
resin matrix, individually and mixed. Material shall possess 0% VOC per ASTM D236995.
9. Installation instructions, maintenance instructions, and general recommendations
regarding each material.
10. Samples of all materials to be used, each properly labeled as specified in Section 2.01.
11. System manufacturer’s Quality Control Manual in compliance with ICC AC10,
“Acceptance Criteria for Quality Control Manuals.”
12. Manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials to be used.
C.
Engineering Calculations
1. Not required, unless specifically required by the construction drawings..
2.
If required, submittal shall include:
a.
Two copies of engineering calculations, design parameters, per Section
2.1-C, and of the FRP reinforcement according to the project
requirements shall be prepared and sealed by a California licensed
Structural Engineer and shall be submitted for the EOR’s review and
acceptance.
b.
Design methodology as approved by the material manufacturer, and shall
conform as a minimum to the requirements set forth in the ICC ES
Acceptance Criteria (AC125) per Section 1.3.
D. Working Drawings
1.
Working shop drawings detailing the locations, dimensions, thickness, number
of layers, joint and end details, and orientations of all FRP materials to be
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
installed. Working drawings shall be prepared and sealed by a California Design
Professional.
E. Quality Control Procedures
1.
Quality Control Procedures shall be supplied for review and approval of the
EOR. The procedure shall be based on the Specification as a minimum
requirement.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer / Supplier Qualifications:
1.
The Manufacturer / Supplier must have a minimum of 3 years experience with
the manufacturing/supplying of the FRP System to be used on this project.
2.
The Manufacturer / Supplier must support and instruct applicators in the
installation of the products specified in this Section.
3.
A list of a minimum of three (3) completed composite strengthening projects
completed with the FRP System to be used for this project. In addition, the
System used must have an approved ICC evaluation report (similar to ICC
AC125). The list should include at a minimum, the dates of work, type,
description and amount of work performed.
B. Applicator Qualifications:
1.
Applicator must be certified by ICC. Alternatively, the Applicator may be
certified by the FRP System Manufacturer by means of written verification, and
have completed a course of instruction (given by the Manufacturer) in the
installation of the FRP System to be used on this project.
2.
A list of a minimum of three (3) completed composite strengthening projects
must have been performed by the certified applicator. The list should include at
a minimum, the dates of work, type, description and amount of work performed,
and the name and telephone number of a contact person at the agency or
company for which the work was completed. In addition, provide the names of
the applicator’s superintended and personnel who will perform the actual work.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
The Applicator shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in performing
composite retrofits with wet lay-up systems.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
A pre-installation meeting shall be held with a representative of the Owner, Engineer, the
Contractor’s Superintendent and Foreman, Manufacturer’s Field Representative and
other trades involved to discuss the conduct of the work of this Section.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
The products shall be delivered and stored in original, unopened containers. Containers
must be clearly marked with legible and intact labels listing the Manufacturer’s name,
brand name, product identification, batch number, manufacturing date, and shelf life.
B.
Stored fiber reinforcement and epoxies must be protected from dust, moisture, and
chemical exposure.
C.
Epoxies must be stored in areas with an ambient temperature according to
manufacturer’s recommendations (between 40 to 100 degree F) and away from direct
sunlight, flame sources, or other hazards. Epoxy resins must be stored separately from
hardeners. After the resin has been mixed with hardener, the mixed epoxy batch must be
used within its pot life.
D.
Fiber reinforcement must not be handled roughly. Fiber must be stored either in rolls
with a radius greater than 12 in (300 mm) or by dry stacking flat.
E.
Products shall be stored according to the manufacturer’s requirements and shall avoid
contact with moisture.
1.8 WARRANTY
The suppliers of the materials used for FRP shall certify and warrant that FRP system properties
will satisfy the minimum “Design Parameters/Values”, Section 2.01-C.6, for 25 years from the
date of installation of FRP System.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Suggested Manufacturers and Products (Glass-Based fibers):
1. Tyfo Fibrwrap SEH51, Composite Strengthening System, per ICC Report No. ESR2103 “Tyfo Fibrwrap Fiber-Reinforced Composite System”, supplied by Fyfe Co.
LLC, 6044 Nancy Ridge Technology Center, 6310 Nancy Ridge Drive, Suite 103, San
Diego, CA 92121, Tel: 858-642-0694, Fax: 858-642-0947.
2. VelaGlass 875U, Composite Strengthening System, per ICC ESR-2095 “Concrete
Strengthening Using FiberbondTM Fiber-Reinforced Polymer Composite System”
supplied by Edge Structure Composite, LLC, 21811 East 8th Street, Sonoma, CA
95476, Tel: 707-343-1560, Fax: 707-935-0942
3. SikaWrap HexWrap 100G Composite Strengthening System, per ICC Report No.
ER-5558 “HEX-3R Structural Composite System”, supplied by SIKA Corporation,
12767 E. Imperial Hwy, Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670, Tel: (562) 903-3660, Fax:
(714) 639-8526.
B. Suggested Manufacturers and Products (Carbon-Based fibers):
1. Tyfo Fibrwrap SCH41, Composite Strengthening System, per ICC Report No. ESR2103, “Tyfo Fibrwrap Fiber-Reinforced Composite System”, supplied by Fyfe Co.
LLC, 6044 Nancy Ridge Technology Center, 6310 Nancy Ridge Drive, Suite 103, San
Diego, CA 92121, Tel: 858-642-0694, Fax: 858-642-0947.
2. VelaCarb 600U, Composite Strengthening System, per ICC ESR-2095 “Concrete
Strengthening Using FiberbondTM Fiber-Reinforced Polymer Composite System”
supplied by Edge Structure Composite, LLC, 21811 East 8th Street, Sonoma, CA
95476, Tel: 707-343-1560, Fax: 707-935-0942
3. SikaWrap HexWrap 103C Composite Strengthening System, per ICC Report No.
ER-5558 “HEX-3R Structural Composite System”, supplied by SIKA Corporation,
12767 E. Imperial Hwy, Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670, Tel: (562) 903-3660, Fax:
(714) 639-8526.
C.
Substitutions: Any alternate system with ICC approval can be proposed to the Owner and
EOR for consideration. Such systems shall satisfy all the pertinent requirements of this
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 7
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
specification section and show equality to acceptable materials suggested above.
Manufacturer’s developed Guidelines for shear strengthening of concrete columns, beam,
walls, diaphragm members for seismic forces, including design equations, shall be
submitted. Supplemental test data in accordance with the documents listed in Section 1.3
may be required. FRP materials used in these test results should be clearly traceable to the
products and product numbers of the manufacturer.
D. Minimum Acceptable System Properties of the Products:
1.
Only wet lay-up, glass-fiber (GFRP) or Carbon-fiber (CFRP) systems are
acceptable.
2.
The FRP composite system Manufacturer/Supplier shall supply all properties
identified in the tables below, and shall satisfy all its requirements.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 8
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
GLASS-Based Systems – Unidirectional Properties
PROPERTY
“Guaranteed”
Value
“Ultimate Tensile Strength” in primary fiber direction
based on “Gross Laminate Area”
“Design”
Value (&)
(More than 65 ksi)
(More than 52 ksi)
(2.6 K/layer/in)
(2.6 K/layer/in)
(More than 3,500
ksi)
(More than 3,500 ksi)
(0.035 to 0.050
in.)
(Same as guaranteed)
(150 Ksi or more)
(Min 150 Ksi)
Minimum
1.7%
1.4%
Maximum
3.5%
3.0%
ASTM D 3039 Test Method
“Minimum Tensile Strength at Rupture” in primary
fiber direction per layer per one inch width of fiber,
ASTM D 3039 Test Method
“Tensile Pseudo Modulus of Elasticity” in primary fiber
direction based on cross sectional area of primary
fibers , per ASTM D 3039 Test Method
Layer Thickness of “Cured FRP System” for
computing “Gross Laminate Area”,
ASTM D 3039 Test Method
“Tensile Stiffness ” in primary fiber direction based on
“unit-width of one layer of cured FRP system” ASTM
D 3039 Test Method
Elongation at Rupture per ASTM D 3039 Test Method
(&) FRP System “Guaranteed” and “Design” Properties to be completed by the FRP System Supplier.
CARBON-Based Systems– Unidirectional Properties
PROPERTY
“Guaranteed”
Value
“Ultimate Tensile Strength” in primary fiber direction
based on “Gross Laminate Area”
ASTM D 3039 Test Method
“Minimum Tensile Strength at Rupture” in primary
fiber direction per layer per one inch width of fiber,
ASTM D 3039 Test Method
“Tensile Pseudo Modulus of Elasticity” in primary fiber
direction based on cross sectional area of primary
fibers , per ASTM D 3039 Test Method
Layer Thickness of “Cured FRP System” for
computing “Gross Laminate Area”,
ASTM D 3039 Test Method
“Design”
Value (&)
(More than 100
ksi)
(More than 85 ksi)
(4.0 K/layer/in)
(4.0 K/layer/in)
(More than 9,000
ksi)
(More than 9,000 ksi)
(0.035 to 0.050
in.)
(Same as guaranteed)
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 9
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
“Tensile Stiffness ” in primary fiber direction based on
“unit-width of one layer of cured FRP system” ASTM
D 3039 Test Method
BFL OWEN
(400 Ksi or more)
(Min 400 Ksi)
Minimum
0.9%
0.7%
Maximum
1.7%
1.5%
Elongation at Rupture per ASTM D 3039 Test Method
(&) FRP System “Guaranteed” and “Design” Properties to be completed by the FRP System Supplier.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 10
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
GLASS-Based Systems – Bidirectional Properties
PROPERTY
“Guaranteed”
Value
“Ultimate Tensile Strength” in primary fiber direction
based on “Gross Laminate Area”
“Design”
Value (&)
(More than 30 ksi)
(More than 30 ksi)
(1.0 K/layer/in)
(1.0 K/layer/in)
(More than 2,000
ksi)
(More than 2,000 ksi)
(0.030 to 0.040
in.)
(Same as guaranteed)
(75 Ksi or more)
(Min 75 Ksi)
Minimum
1.5%
1.2%
Maximum
3.5%
3.0%
ASTM D 3039 Test Method
“Minimum Tensile Strength at Rupture” in primary
fiber direction per layer per one inch width of fiber,
ASTM D 3039 Test Method
“Tensile Pseudo Modulus of Elasticity” in primary fiber
direction based on cross sectional area of primary
fibers , per ASTM D 3039 Test Method
Layer Thickness of “Cured FRP System” for
computing “Gross Laminate Area”,
ASTM D 3039 Test Method
“Tensile Stiffness ” in primary fiber direction based on
“unit-width of one layer of cured FRP system” ASTM
D 3039 Test Method
Elongation at Rupture per ASTM D 3039 Test Method
(&) FRP System “Guaranteed” and “Design” Properties to be completed by the FRP System Supplier.
3.
In the tables above, the “Guaranteed values” are defined as established testing
results using Mean (average) value minus two times of the standard deviation of
the testing results. “Design Values” shall be obtained by multiplying the CE
Factor by the “Guaranteed Values”.
4.
The FRP System supplier shall furnish an “Environmental Reduction Factor
(CE)” appropriate for their systems and the environmental conditions expected at
the project site, based on durability test values obtained by independent
laboratories. Unless complete testing is submitted to indicate otherwise, the
presume maximum values for CE shall be 80% for Glass-based and 85% for
Carbon-based systems.
5.
The FRP System supplier shall certify and warrant that FRP system properties
will not fall below the “Design Values” shown below for 25 years from the date
of installation of FRP System.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 11
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
6.
BFL OWEN
The FRP System supplier shall provide and protect his installed system with
proper protective coating(s) to protect his system from the environment as part of
this project scope, in addition to any specified coatings as part of this project.
E. FRP Composite System
The FRP composite system shall include all necessary components such as,
Primer/Filler, Composite Fabric, Epoxy Resin/Saturant,, Anchorage, protective coating,
Fire coating, and finish paint. Cured composite overlay shall conform to the approved
ICC evaluation report and meet the required material properties in Section 2.1.D.
1.
Refer to American Concrete Institute - ACI Committee 440 of Section 1.3.B.2,
for definition of various terms and properties shown here.
2.
The FRP composite system Manufacturer/Supplier shall supply all properties
identified in the table above, and shall satisfy all its requirements.
3.
FRP composites consisting of fiber reinforcement and polymers provided by
more than one manufacturer/supplier are not allowed.
4.
FRP composite systems manufacturer shall supply “independent” material test
data, structural test data for various applications, and durability data
representative of the anticipated environment in this project.
5.
The FRP system manufacturer shall provide the independent and adequate test
data demonstrating that their proposed FRP system meets all mechanical and
physical design requirements.
6.
The material tests shall involve sufficient laboratory testing to measure the
repeatability and reliability of critical properties.
7.
FRP composite systems that have not been fully and “independently” tested are
not acceptable.
8.
Mechanical properties of FRP systems shall be determined from tests on
laminates manufactured in a process representative of their field installation.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 12
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
9.
BFL OWEN
Mechanical properties should be tested in general conformance with the
procedures listed in Appendix B of the referenced ACI 440 document.
F. Primer / Filler
1.
Thickened (paste) epoxy shall be supplied and used by the manufacturer based
on the ICC approval project requirements to fill void and provide protective seal
coat.
G. Fiber Reinforcement
1. Dry fiber shall be unidirectional sheet of Fiber Reinforcement.
H. Polymer Resins - SATURANT
I.
1.
Polymer resins should be selected based on the ambient temperature of the site at
the time of installation.
2.
The polymer components provided as part of the FRP composite system shall be
according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and be according to what have
been tested in Section 1.03A.
Anchorage
1.
Anchors to be used at termination points of bands which do not encase an
element, and where specified on the drawings. Anchorage fiber and epoxy shall
be selected by supplier based on the Manufacturer’s recommendations or as
specified by ICC report for the system.
J. Protective Coatings
1.
Protective coatings should be selected or approved by the material
Manufacturer/Supplier. The fiber shall consist of a fine woven fiber fabric to
provide relatively smooth surface.
K. Fire Coating
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 13
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
BFL OWEN
Fire Coating Composite System shall have 2-hour rating to satisfy ASTM E84 Class 1
flame and smoke spread, ASTM El 19 and certification by Underwriters Laboratories. Fire
resistant system shall have a minimum thickness of 1/32 of an inch, and shall be
applied to all edges and seams of the applied composite.
L. Finish Paint
1.
Paint shall be supplied by manufacturer and shall match the original color or the
color selected by Architect/Owner. The paint material shall be lead-free and in
conformance with the current code requirements.
2.2 OTHER MATERIALS
A.
Provide other materials as needed for the proper installation of the complete composite
system as selected by the contractor in conformance with these specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine existing conditions to assess quality of concrete substrate, identify potential
obstructions, and verify dimensions/geometry shown on contract document and shop
drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Environmental Conditions
1.
Do not install FRP when the ambient temperature is not within the manufacturer
recommended temperature for installation. In cold conditions, auxiliary heat
may be applied to raise the ambient temperature to a suitable level. Utilize clean
heat sources for this purpose (e.g., electric or propane) that do not contaminate
the substrate with carbonation.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 14
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
2.
The presence of moisture inhibits the adhesion of the epoxies to the substrate.
Do not install FRP when surface moisture is present on the substrate or when
rainfall or condensation is anticipated in the work areas. If moisture cannot be
avoided, use the manufacturer’s suggested wet prime epoxy, subject to the prior
approval of the EOR.
3.
If water leakage exists through cracks or concrete joints, water flow must be
stopped prior to FRP installation.
B. Site Conditions
1.
Maintain control of concrete chips, dust, and debris in each area of work. Clean
up and remove such material at the completion of each day of blasting.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
Installation procedures shall be provided by the installer/contractor for the prior approval by
the EOR. The work specified under this specification shall be performed by an applicator with
proven past experience per Section 3.4.
B. Concrete Repair
1.
Unsound areas of the concrete substrate (such as broken pieces, delaminated
areas, spalls, irregular surfaces, etc.) shall be removed to reveal sound material.
2.
If corrosion of the existing steel reinforcement exists, the steel and concrete must
be repaired before installation of the FRP. Any deteriorated concrete or
corroding reinforcing steel must be repaired per ICRI Guideline #03730. DO
NOT COVER CORRODING REINFORCING STEEL WITH FRP.
3.
Voids in the concrete substrate greater than 0.50 in (500 mm) in depth or radius
must be filled with an appropriate repair mortar or thickened epoxy paste. The
repair material shall be selected per ICRI Guideline #03733 and the project
requirements and approved by EOR. If required, the bond strength of the repair
material to the existing concrete may be verified with direct pull testing per
ASTM D 4541. Minimum direct pull-off strength required is 200 psi (1.4 MPa)
and 50 psi (.35 MPa) for Bond-critical and contact-critical applications,
respectively.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 15
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
4.
BFL OWEN
Cracks in the concrete substrate greater than 1/64 in (0.25 mm) wide must be
injected with epoxy or similar material approved by the EOR.
C. Surface Preparation
1.
Prior to initiating surface preparation procedures, the Contractor shall first
prepare a representative sample area. The sample area shall be prepared in
accordance with the requirements of this Specification, and shall be used as a
reference standard depicting a satisfactorily prepared substrate.
2.
The surface to receive composite shall be free from fins, sharp edges and
protrusions that will cause voids behind the installed composite or that, in the
opinion of the EOR, will damage the fibers. Existing uneven surfaces to receive
composite shall be filled with epoxy filler or other material approved by the
Engineer.
3.
Uneven concrete surface irregularities (offsets) must be ground and smoothed to
less than 0.04 in (1 mm).
4.
When fiber reinforcement is run around outside corners or edges, these corners
must be rounded to a radius of no less than ¾ inch (25 mm). Application of fiber
reinforcement around inside corners shall be avoided. No detailing is required if
fiber is run parallel to corners. Variations in the radius along the edge shall not
exceed 1/8” for every 12” of length.
4. The substrate must be cleaned of any dust, debris, or laitance. Concrete surfaces
shall have all foreign materials removed and be broom cleaned.
a. Columns (Contact-critical): Stripping off paint from column surfaces is
required, unless it can be shown that the paint is well adhered (a minimum of
50 psi bond capacity between the paint and column exists). One prime coat
of the manufacturer’s epoxy shall be applied prior to wrapping columns with
the composite.
b. Beams (Bond-critical): Stripping off paint from beam surfaces is required.
In addition, the concrete surface receiving the FRP overlay shall be
roughened to expose the aggregate (minimum of 1/8” amplitude). All contact
surfaces shall then be cleaned by hand. One prime coat of the manufacturer’s
epoxy shall be applied prior to wrapping columns with the composite. Bond
critical surface preparation techniques shall be verified by means of adhesion
testing.
c. Others (slabs, walls, etc.): shall be per Item b. above.
d. For surfaces that do not allow complete encasement with the composite
system, surfaces shall be prepared for bonding by means of abrasive blasting
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 16
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
or grinding to achieve a 1/16” minimum amplitude. All contact surfaces shall
then be cleaned by hand or compressed air. One prime coat of the
manufacturer’s epoxy shall be applied and allowed to cure for a minimum of
one hour. Prior to the application of the saturated composite fabric, fill any
uneven surfaces with the manufacturer’s thickened epoxy. Bond critical
surface preparation techniques shall be verified by means of adhesion testing.
Provide anchorage as detailed on construction drawings.
D. Application of Surface Primer and Filler
1.
Primer must be thoroughly mixed with hardener at the specified ratio in the
mixing pot until it is uniformly mixed (about 2 minutes). Agitation shall be by
means of electric hand mixer. Volume of primer prepared at one time must be
such that it can be applied within its batch life. A mixed primer batch which has
exceeded its batch life must not be used. (The batch life may vary subject to
ambient temperature or volume of the mixed primer batch and care must be
taken accordingly.)
2.
Prime the concrete surface with the penetrating primer prior to application of any
subsequent coatings using a medium nap roller. The primer shall be applied
uniformly in sufficient quantity to fully penetrate the concrete and produce a
nonporous film in the surface not to exceed 2 dry mils (50 micrometers) in
thickness after full penetration. Volume to be applied may vary depending on
orientation and roughness of the concrete surface.
3.
Apply filler/putty to primed surfaces to fill small substrate voids and
irregularities.
4.
Surface irregularities caused by the primer and/or filler coating must be ground
smooth using disc sander. Subsequent dust must be cleaned from the surface
using a dry cloth or brush.
E. Application of FRP Reinforcement
1.
The epoxy matrix shall be prepared by combining components at the weight (or
volume) ratio specified on the manufacturer’s labeled units. The components of
epoxy resin shall be mixed with a mechanical mixer until uniformly mixed, per
the manufacturer’s recommendations. Components that have exceeded their shelf
life (as designated on the material label) shall not be used.
2.
Fiber sheet must be cut beforehand into prescribed sizes using scissors and/or
cutter. The size of fiber sheet to be cut is preferably less than 10 ft (3 m) in
length, but may be longer if access allows.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 17
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.
BFL OWEN
When the primer coat has been left unattended for more than one week after the
application, the surface of the primer coat must be roughened using sandpaper
and cleaned of any dust with a dry cloth or brush. DO NOT SOLVENT WIPE.
4. For FRP systems where pre-saturation is required prior to installation:
a)
Saturation of the fabric shall be performed and monitored according to
manufacturer’s specified fiber-resin ratio. Fabric shall be completely
saturated prior to application to contact surface in order to assure
complete impregnation of fabric.
b)
Saturation shall be supervised and checked by the properly trained
representative of the installer. Set-up of saturator: Gap to be measured to
confirm calibrated setting for optimum properties composite system.
Saturator shall be previously calibrated to determine the required gap
setting to achieve the optimum fiber to epoxy ratio as per the
manufacturer's quality control manual.
c)
Both the epoxy resin and fabric shall be measured accurately, combined,
and deposited uniformly at the rates shown on the approved working
drawings and per manufacturer's recommendations. The composite
system shall be comprised of fibers completely saturated with epoxy
resin per proper ratio.
5. For FRP systems where saturation is achieved on the primed surface:
a)
Fiber sheets with an areal weight less than or equal to 9 oz/yd2 (300
g/m2), apply saturant coat to primed surface OR fiber sheet using a
medium nap roller (3/8 in or 9.5 mm) to a wet film thickness of 18 to 22
mil (500 micrometers).
b)
For fiber sheets with an areal weight exceeding 9 oz/yd2 (300 g/m2),
apply saturant coat to BOTH the primed surface AND the fiber sheet
using a medium nap roller (3/8 in or 9.5 mm) to a wet film thickness of
18 to 22 mil (500 micrometers).
c)
Fiber sheet must be placed onto the concrete substrate to achieve
intimate contact and must be rolled in the direction of the fibers using a
rib roller in order to facilitate impregnation of the resin into the fiber
sheet.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 18
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
6.
For joining strips of fiber sheet in the fiber longitudinal direction, a 6 in (150
mm) overlapping length is required for the E-glass fiber sheets. At the
overlapping location, additional resin is applied to the outer surface of the fiber
sheet layer to be overlapped. No lapping is required in the fiber lateral direction.
7.
Minimize the elapsed time between mixing and application of the saturant to
ensure the material is applied within the pot life of the material to avoid any
thickening or gelling.
8.
A second coat of mixed resin must then be applied onto the surface of the fiber
sheet using a medium nap roller (3/8 in or 9.5 mm) to a wet film thickness of 18
to 22 mil (500 micrometers).
9.
When more than one layer of fiber sheet must be consolidated into the laminate,
the processes as detailed in Items 1 through 8 must be repeated.
10.
During installation and initial curing of the FRP composite, the work must be
protected from moisture, dust, extreme temperatures, and physical damage by
using protective sheeting or other barriers. Initial curing of FRP must be for no
less 24 hours. Epoxy curing temperatures shall be maintained in the temperature
range designated for the formulation used. Temperature cure ranges and times
shall be determined by manufacturer.
F. Application of Protective Coatings
G.
H.
1.
Protective coatings shall be applied as a final, outermost layer to the externally
bonded FRP reinforcement.
2.
Protective coatings shall not be applied before the final resin coat has become
tack free.
3.
The surface to which the protective coatings are to be applied must be cleaned of
any dust or debris using a dry cloth or brush. The surface must also be free of
any moisture, oils, or other substances that would prohibit bond of the coating
Fabric sampling is required per 3.4.G.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE:
1.
Prepare surface as required, including corner preparation.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 19
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
2.
Broom clean surface per specification.
3.
Clean up and protect area adjacent to element.
4.
Using a roller or trowel, apply one prime coat of thickened epoxy resin to the
concrete surface (2 mil. min.). Allow primer to become tacky to the touch.
5.
Fill any uneven surfaces or recesses with thickened epoxy.
6.
Saturate fabric with epoxy matrix through properly set saturator.
7.
Apply saturated fabric to concrete surface by hand lay-up, using methods that
produce a uniform, constant tensile force that is distributed across the entire
width of fabric. Under certain application conditions, the system may be placed
entirely by hand methods assuring a uniform, even final appearance. Gaps
between composite bands may not exceed 1/2 inch in width in the fabric's
transverse joint unless otherwise noted on project drawings. A lap length of at
least 6 inches is required at all necessary over-laps in the longitudinal direction
of the fabric.
8.
Each layer of fabric shall be applied in the orientation required by the project
drawings.
9.
Apply subsequent layers, continuously or spliced, until designed number of
layers is achieved, per project drawings.
10.
Using a roller or hand pressure, insure proper orientation of fibers, release or roll
out entrapped air, and ensure that each individual layer is firmly bedded and
adhered to the preceding layer or substrate.
11.
Apply a final coat of thickened epoxy. Detail all fabric edges, including
butt splice, termination points, and jacket edges, with epoxy.
12.
Apply fire coating per manufacturer's published installation procedures in
accordance with UL and Warnock Hersey testing and per ICC ES Evaluation
Report.
13.
Finish: Refer to architectural specification for final finish. Use system as
directed by manufacturer. Paint as specified between 24 and 72 hours after final
application of epoxy. If after 72 hours the epoxy is cured, the surface must be
roughened by sanding or brush blasting
14.
System may incorporate structural fasteners but limitations and detailing must be
verified with composite system manufacturer.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Installer shall be qualified by showing evidence that he/she has been utilizing the
approved composite system for a minimum of 10 projects with over 200 elements
strengthened. A trained field supervisor, hired by contractor, shall observe all aspects of
onsite preparation and material application including surface preparation, resin
component mixing, application of primer, application of resin and fiber sheet, curing of
composite, and the application of protective coatings.
B.
Contractor shall record batch numbers for fabric and epoxy used each day, and note
locations of installation. Contractor shall also measure square footage of fabric and
volume of epoxy used each day. Contractor shall label Material Test specimens from
each day’s production and submit ASTM 3039 test results as they are made available.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 20
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
C.
BFL OWEN
Inspection: Continuous Special Inspection shall be performed by a Certified Deputy
Inspector (Inspector), provided by the Owner and approved by the building
officials/County, or a Registered Engineer specified by the Owner. Inspector shall
observe all aspects of preparation, mixing, and application of materials, including the
following:
1.
Material container labels
2.
Surface Preparation
3.
Mixing of epoxy
4.
Application of epoxy to the fiber
4.
5.
6.
7.
Application of composite system
Curing of composite material Preparation and labeling of test samples.
Supervise all adhesion (ASTM D4541) testing (if required).
Visual inspections and sounding of the installed composite.
In addition, the FRP casing shall be inspected by the Deputy Inspector during and
immediately following application of the composite.
D.
Inspection for Voids / Delaminations: As a part of the quality control process, Contractor
shall perform the following inspections on each column:
1.
After allowing at least 24 hours for initial resin cure to occur, perform a visual
and acoustic tap test inspection of the layered surface.
2.
Large delaminations shall be marked for repair. Small delaminations less than 2
in2 (1300 mm2 ) in size, do not require corrective action.
If the above deficiencies are found, Contractor shall inform Inspector and follow
the EOR’s recommendation to proceed with proper repair, if necessary.
Inspector shall also perform the above tests independently. Voids or
delaminations more than 2 in2 (1300 mm2 ) which are not localized, shall be
reported to the EOR for his/her recommendations. If necessary, deficiencies shall
be repaired according to Section 3.5.
E.
Bond Testing:
Contractor shall perform Bond Tests in accordance with the following instruction. The instrument
to be used is a fixed alignment portable adhesion tester manufactured by Elcometer Instruments, Ltd.
Inspector shall be present during each test. For any test that fails to pass, Inspector shall
notify the EOR and Contractor shall follow the recommendation of the EOR to perform
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 21
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
more tests or to repair the unsatisfactory areas in accordance with Section 3.5 of this
specification.
1.
Direct tension pull-off tests shall be conducted to evaluate the bond of the FRP
system. Test Conditions:
a)
The FRP system shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 24 hours before
execution of the direct tension pull-off test.
b)
The locations of the pull-off test shall be representative and on flat
surfaces. If possible, pull-off tests shall be conducted on areas of the
FRP system subjected to relatively low stress during service.
2. Test Frequency
3.
a)
Perform a minimum of one pull-off test per day per 500 ft2 surface area
of installed FRP reinforcement for Contact-critical and one per 150 ft2
surface area of installed FRP reinforcement for Bond-critical systems.
b)
Pull-off tests must be performed on each area of fiber sheet installed on
a single day.
c)
Pull-off tests must be performed on each type of concrete substrate or for
each surface preparation technique used if variations in such conditions
exist.
Test Procedure
a)
The FRP surface to which the adhesion fixture is to be mounted shall be
sanded smooth with medium grit sandpaper, rinsed with water, and
allowed to dry.
b)
Attach the adhesion fixture with the designated bonding agent. Leave to
cure in accordance with bonding agent manufacturer's instructions.
c)
Core drill or square cut around the perimeter of the adhesion fixture
through the FRP laminate and into the substrate concrete using carbide
tipped or diamond core bit or cutting wheel. Cut to a depth of 0.25 to 0.5
in. (6 - 12 mm) into the concrete.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 22
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
d)
Position the detaching assembly over the adhesion fixture and attach the
adhesion fixture to the detaching assembly. Align perpendicularly.
Adjust the detaching-assembly legs as required.
e)
Take up the slack in the adhesion tester by screwing down the
adjustment knob.
f) Set the force indicator to the zero mark.
4.
F.
G.
Apply a manual or mechanised loading force to provide a constant cross
head speed until the adhesion fixture detaches from the concrete
element.
h)
The loading rate shall be such that the fixture detaches in less than 100
seconds.
The failure mode must be Cohesive failure within the concrete.
5.
6.
g)
The tensile bond strength must be in excess of 200 psi (1.4 MPa) for Bondcritical and 50 psi (0.35 MPa) for Contact-critical application.
Repair the tested areas in accordance with Section 3.5.D of this specification.
Load Testing: If required by the EOR, a representative area(s) determined by the EOR
shall be in-situ load tested before and after application of FRP system to verify results.
FRP Material Sampling and Testing Procedure:
Contractor is responsible to obtain samples for quality control procedure. This includes
samples for Contractor Tests and also additional samples for testing by an independent
testing agency, provided by the Owner.
Samples and Testing shall be performed in accordance with the procedure outlined in this
section. Inspector shall be present during the sampling. All samples shall be marked and
stored by Contractor.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 23
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
For any test that fails to pass, Inspector shall notify the EOR and Contractor shall follow
the recommendation of the EOR to perform more tests or to repair the unsatisfactory areas
in accordance with Section 3.5 of this specification.
1.
2.
Sampling Procedure:
a)
A minimum of six “test samples” shall be made daily during installation
of FRP. Two samples shall be provided to the Inspector for owner
testing.
b)
Each “three samples” shall be taken every four hours of work as to
ensure the maximum material deviance in the components of the FRP
System, and shall be labeled distinctly. One of the “three samples” shall
be submitted to the Inspector (see Section 3.4G2B). Each test sample
shall consist of two-ply measuring 12 inch by 12 inch of cured
composite.
c)
From a FRP saturated fabric according to the specified fiber-resin ratio
cut two 12” x 12” two-ply Test Samples.
d)
On a smooth, flat, level surface covered with polyethylene sheeting, or
16 mil plastic film, prime the sheathing, or film, with epoxy resin.
e)
The lot/batch number of fabric and resin used for each test sample shall
be recorded along with the location of installation.
f)
Prepare the sample by placing two layers of saturated fabric oriented in
the same direction. Apply additional topping of epoxy. Cover with
plastic film and squeegee out all bubbles.
g)
Samples shall be identified or marked and be stored in a sample box and
not moved for a minimum of 48 hours after casting.
Laboratory Testing:
A) Basic Testing:
Contractor shall conduct the following tests for quality control purposes. Tests
shall be conducted at the expense of Contractor. Only pre-qualified testing
laboratories shall be used. Testing Laboratory shall provide the results of testing
to Inspector and also the EOR as outlined in this section.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 24
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
a)
Testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory pre-approved
by the Owner/EOR. Testing laboratory shall pre-condition the test
samples at 140 degrees Fahrenheit for 48 hours before testing.
b)
A minimum of eight of ¾” x 9” “Test Coupons” shall be cut from each 12” x 12”
test sample. Test coupons shall be tested for their material properties in the
longitudinal (e-glass fiber) direction. Test samples shall be tested according to
the requirements of ASTM D3039
c)
Testing results shall be made available within 3 weeks of sample
submission. The testing shall provide average values, based on nominal
layer thickness, of the following: ultimate tensile load and strength,
tensile modulus, and percent elongation at break.
d)
e)
A total of fifteen percent (15%) of all “Test Samples” shall be tested.
If one “Test Coupon” fails the test, then three more coupons from the
same test sample, of which the failed coupon was taken from, shall be
tested. If these coupons also fail (on average), then three other coupons
shall be cut and tested from the other “Test Sample” that was taken on
the same day from the same saturated FRP fabric as the failed sample.
In the case that this sample also fails, appropriate remedial measures
shall be taken per Section 3.4 G2B(b), and per the recommendations and
approval of the EOR. In addition, 25% of the remaining “samples” will
then be tested by the same criteria. All testing done in Section 3.4 G2(e)
shall be at the contractor’s expense.
B) Samples for Independent Testing:
Additional samples shall be obtained by Contractor and delivered to Inspector
for Independent Testing. These tests are performed at the expense of the Owner
by a pre-approved testing agency. Testing Laboratory shall perform testing of
additional samples based on instruction of EOR and if needed, Contractor shall
provide more samples for completion of Independent Testing as outlined
hereafter.
a)
If the four “Test Coupons” from the Inspector’s sample fail, then the
Inspector shall request an additional “Test Coupon” from the same test
samples taken at the same time and day as the original sample provided
to the Inspector. If the samples furnished to the Inspector fail twice in a
one-week period, a stop work order shall be issued.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 25
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
b)
BFL OWEN
In the event that material testing, per Section 3.4 G2A(e), determines a
“sample” to possess deficient material properties, remedial measures
shall be taken. Any structural member where the installed FRP
composite system has material properties determined to be below the
minimum specified values, additional FRP layers shall be installed
until the FRP thickness is increased to compensate for the deficient
properties, subject to the approval of the EOR.
3. Reporting Test Results
a) Contractor shall submit test results to the Inspector biweekly. In
the event the “Test Coupons” fail the test described in Section
3.4G2A, test results shall be submitted to the Inspector within 4
days of the submission of sample for testing.
b) Report: The contractor shall submit a quality control report to the
EOR identifying the trained field supervisor, describing the
inspection of the completed installation, and detailing the results
of the bond testing on a biweekly basis.
3.5 REPAIR OF DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE AREAS
Repairs, if deemed necessary, shall be performed in Contractor’s expense in accordance with the
following instruction.
A.
Repair of all the defective work after the minimum cure time for the FRP laminates shall
comply with material and procedural requirements defined in this Specification.
B.
Repair all defects in a manner that will restore the system to the designed level of
quality. Repair procedures for conditions that are not specifically addressed in this
specification shall be approved by the EOR. All repairs and touch up shall be made to the
satisfaction of the Owner’s representative and the EOR.
C.
All defects (including bubbles, delaminations, and fabric tears) more than 2” in
dimension or as requested by the Owner or EOR shall be repaired. Two types of repairs
shall be performed:
1.
Small defects or bubbles (less than 4” in dimension) shall be injected or back
filled with epoxy. Two small holes shall be drilled into the bubble to allow
injection of the epoxy and escape of entrapped air.
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 26
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.
BFL OWEN
Other defects and bubbles shall be repaired by pre-approved repair procedure
proposed by the contractor and approved by the EOR, and shall be performed to
the satisfaction and approval of the EOR.
D.
Repair all areas damaged by pull-off (bond) testing. Fill the tested area to match the
thickness of FRP overlay by approved epoxy paste. Reinforce the punched and repaired
area by adding min 2 additional FRP plies extending at least six inches beyond the
damaged area on each side.
E.
All built-in electrical boxes shall be dealt with as void. Reinforce such area around these
boxes by adding min 2 additional FRP plies extending at least six inches beyond the
damaged area on each side (along the longitudinal direction of the concrete element) and
extend to the edge of such elements along the transverse direction (primary direction of
applied FRP overlay).
END OF SECTION 03750
EXTERNALLY APPLIED FRP COMPOSITE SYSTEMS
03750 - 27
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes structural steel.
B.
This Section includes structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel.
C.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
1.3
1.4
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for loose steel bearing plates and
miscellaneous steel framing.
Division 9 Section "Painting" for surface preparation and priming requirements.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract
Documents to be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings
indicated.
B.
Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional
engineer to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for structural
steel connections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for each type of product specified.
C.
Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent
data.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field
bolts. Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned
shear/bearing connections.
Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
D.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
E.
Mill test reports signed by manufacturers certifying that their products, including the
following, comply with requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.5
BFL OWEN
Structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
Direct-tension indicators.
Shear stud connectors.
Shop primers.
Nonshrink grout.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural
steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel
similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel
without delaying the Work.
1.
Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be
designated an AISC-Certified Plant as follows:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Category: Category I, conventional steel structures.
Category: Category II, complex steel building structures.
Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1.
AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design
and Plastic Design."
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
BFL OWEN
AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design (LFRD) Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings."
AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members."
AISC's "Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle
Members."
AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings."
ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled
Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use."
Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Load and Resistance
Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490
Bolts."
D.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized
to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as
those performed for projects with structural steel framing that are similar to that
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
E.
Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
1.
F.
Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification
tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone
recertification.
Mockups: Prior to installing architecturally exposed structural steel, construct mockups
for each form of construction and finish required to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well
as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1.
2.
3.
Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not
indicated, as directed by Architect.
Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship of steel
surfaces and welded and bolted connections.
a. Coordinate finish painting requirements of mockups with Division 9 Section
"Painting."
4.
5.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as
a standard for judging the completed Work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
G.
1.6
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure
continuity of installation.
B.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.
1.
Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that
become dry or rusty before use.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or
damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged
materials or structures as directed.
2.
1.7
BFL OWEN
SEQUENCING
A.
Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without
delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as
required, for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
High-Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel:
ASTM A 572
(ASTM A 572M), Grade 50.
High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 588 (ASTM A 588M),
Grade 50, corrosion resistant.
B.
Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
C.
Hot-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Weight Class: Standard.
Weight Class: Extra strong.
Weight Class: Double-extra strong.
Finish: Black.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
5.
6.
BFL OWEN
Finish: Galvanized.
Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.
E.
Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65-35 (ASTM A 27M, Grade 450-240),
medium-strength carbon steel.
F.
High-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 148, Grade 80-50 (ASTM A 148M, (Grade 550345).
G.
Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, coldfinished carbon steel, AWS D1.1, Type B.
H.
Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
I.
Nonhigh-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568,
Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened
steel washers.
1.
2.
3.
J.
Unheaded Rods: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
Unheaded Rods: ASTM A 572, Grade 50 (ASTM A 572M, Grade 345).
Unheaded Bolts: ASTM A 687, high strength.
Headed Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); carbonsteel, hex-head bolts; and carbon-steel nuts.
Headed Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural
bolts and heavy hex carbon-steel nuts.
Headed Bolts: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural
bolts and heavy hex carbon-steel nuts.
Washers: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
Finish: Plain, uncoated.
Finish: Hot-dip zinc-coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.
Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc-coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1,
heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel
washers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Finish: Plain, uncoated.
Finish: Hot-dip zinc-coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.
Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc-coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.
Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325.
a.
b.
c.
K.
Finish: Plain, uncoated.
Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc-coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.
Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc-coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50, epoxy
coated.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1,
heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel
washers, uncoated.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
L.
2.2
2.3
2.4
BFL OWEN
Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, uncoated.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
PRIMER
A.
Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer with good
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, complying with performance requirements
of FS TT-P-664.
B.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 25; red iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil and alkyd primer.
C.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer.
D.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide.
E.
Primer:
primer.
F.
Primer: Nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC's "Painting System Guide No. 7.00."
G.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds and
repair painting galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 93 percent zinc
dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20.
Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting
GROUT
A.
Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 404, Size No. 2. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume,
with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
B.
Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, ferrous aggregate
grout, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and a 30minute working time.
C.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:
Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive,
nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage
compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with
ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and a 30-minute working time.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop
Drawings.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Camber structural steel members where indicated.
Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) and
maintain markings until steel has been erected.
Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field
handling of structural steel.
Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting
shop-priming operations.
Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel.
Fabricate architecturally exposed structural steel with exposed surfaces smooth, square,
and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names, and roughness.
1.
2.
C.
BFL OWEN
Remove blemishes by filling, grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to
cleaning, treating, and shop priming.
Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC's
"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally
exposed structural steel.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded.
D.
Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in
bearing.
E.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear
connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's printed instructions.
F.
Steel Wall Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall framing
to be attached to structural steel framing. Straighten as required to provide uniform,
square, and true members in completed wall framing.
G.
Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural steel framing.
Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to
frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk, cross-recessed head
machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches (250 mm) o.c., unless
otherwise indicated.
H.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for
passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on Shop Drawings.
1.
2.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes
or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive
other work.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 7
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.5
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
Shop install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are
indicated.
B.
Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C.
Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Load and Resistance
Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise
indicated.
Bolts: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise
indicated.
Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct-tension,
or tensioned shear/bearing connections.
Connection Type:
Slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing
connections as indicated.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
2.
2.6
BFL OWEN
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment
of axes without warp.
Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for
architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable
tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel
surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch (13 mm) and larger. Grind
flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS
A.
Definition: Prefabricated building columns consist of assemblies composed of loadbearing structural steel members encased in manufacturer's standard insulating material
for fire protection and wrapped in outer nonload-bearing steel sheet enclosures.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide prefabricated building column assemblies
identical to those of assemblies tested for the following fire-resistance ratings per
ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Identify columns with appropriate markings of applicable testing
and inspecting agency.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fire-Resistance Rating:
Fire-Resistance Rating:
Fire-Resistance Rating:
Fire-Resistance Rating:
4 hours.
3 hours.
2 hours.
As indicated.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 8
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
C.
Column Configuration: Provide columns of sizes and shapes indicated. Fabricate
connections to comply with details shown or required to suit type of structure indicated.
1.
Concrete Fill: Structural concrete, manufacturer's standard mix, with a minimum
28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi (34.5 MPa), machine mixed and
mechanically vibrated during placement to produce a concrete core free of voids.
D.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering prefabricated building columns that may be incorporated in the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
E.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prefabricated building
columns by one of the following:
1.
2.
2.7
BFL OWEN
Black Rock Column, Inc.
Dean Lally L.P.; Firetrol Division.
SHOP PRIMING
A.
Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale,
and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
Surfaces to be field welded.
Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
Surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing.
Galvanized surfaces.
SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 5 "White Metal Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 7 "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 8 "Pickling."
SSPC-SP 10 "Near-White Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 11 "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
Priming:
Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to
manufacturer's instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full
coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1.
2.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 9
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
D.
2.8
Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC's "Painting System
Guide No. 7.00" to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
GALVANIZING
A.
2.9
BFL OWEN
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
indicated for galvanizing according to ASTM A 123.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1.
2.
Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test
specimens comply with or deviate from requirements.
Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being
fabricated or produced so required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test
reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
C.
Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance
of corrected Work with specified requirements.
D.
Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
E.
Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Load and
Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or
A 490 Bolts."
1.
Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959,
Table 2.
F.
In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be inspected and tested
according to AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's
option.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level
"2-2T."
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 10
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
G.
BFL OWEN
In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be inspected and
tested according to requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:
1.
2.
Bend tests will be performed when visual inspections reveal either less than a
continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors when weld fracture occurs
on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements of AWS D1.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete
and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with
requirements.
B.
Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep
structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and
loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent
structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
3.3
Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until
cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
ERECTION
A.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC specifications referenced in this Section.
B.
Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom
surface of base and bearing plates.
1.
2.
3.
Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting
nuts as required.
Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with
edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.
a.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proprietary grout materials.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 11
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
C.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
1.
D.
Maintain erection tolerances of architecturally exposed structural steel within
AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that
will be in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
2.
3.4
BFL OWEN
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating
temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature
at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when
completed and in service.
E.
Splice members only where indicated.
F.
Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with
plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
G.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
H.
Finish sections thermally cut during erection equal to a sheared appearance.
I.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes
that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
Install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are indicated.
B.
Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C.
Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Load and Resistance Factor
Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bolts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise
indicated.
Bolts: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M) high-strength bolts, unless otherwise
indicated.
Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, directtension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections.
Connection Type: Slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing
connections as indicated.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 12
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
D.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing,
adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces
adjacent to field welds.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true
alignment of axes without warp.
Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for
architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable
tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back-side welding on exposed steel
surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch (13 mm) and larger. Grind
flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds.
PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS
A.
3.6
BFL OWEN
Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC specifications referenced in
this Section, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of the testing and
inspecting agency that apply to the fire-resistance rating indicated.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.
1.
Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether
tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test
reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements.
C.
Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance
of corrected Work with specified requirements.
D.
Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
E.
Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Load and
Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or
A 490 Bolts."
1.
F.
Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959,
Table 2.
In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections will be inspected and tested
according to AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's
option.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 13
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level
"2-2T."
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
In addition to visual inspection, field-welded shear connectors will be inspected and
tested according to requirements of AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows:
1.
2.
3.7
BFL OWEN
Bend tests will be performed when visual inspections reveal either less than a
continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors when weld fracture
occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements of
AWS D1.1.
CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used
for shop painting.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038
mm).
B.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint on structural steel are included in Division 9 Section
"Painting."
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 14
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
List Level 1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
2.
Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports
are not specified in other Sections.
Related Sections include the following:
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural-steel framing
system components.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.
Prefabricated building columns.
Cast nosings and treads.
Extruded nosings and treads.
Paint products.
Grout.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal
fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under
other Sections.
Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded
nosing and tread.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet
certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures
and personnel.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and
experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and
owners, and other information specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal
fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with
a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the
following:
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification
tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has
undergone recertification.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit
walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed
with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and
fitting.
COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish
setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing
anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts,
and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time
for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
List Level 2
METALS, GENERAL
Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in
the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat
surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or
roughness.
FERROUS METALS
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate
complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M,
Grade C or D.
Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with
ASTM A 500.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless
another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.
Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with flange
edges returned toward web and with 9/16-inch- (14.3-mm-) wide
slotted holes in webs at 2 inches (51 mm) o.c.
Width of Channels: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).
Depth of Channels: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).
Depth of Channels: As indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Metal and Thickness: Galvanized steel complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230),
with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.108-inch (2.8-mm) nominal thickness.
Metal and Thickness: Galvanized steel complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230),
with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.079-inch (2-mm) nominal thickness.
Metal and Thickness: Galvanized steel complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230),
with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.064-inch (1.6-mm) nominal thickness.
Metal and Thickness: Uncoated steel complying with ASTM A 570,
Grade 33; 0.0966-inch (2.5-mm) minimum thickness.
Metal and Thickness: Uncoated steel complying with ASTM A 570,
Grade 33; 0.0677-inch (1.7-mm) minimum thickness.
Metal and Thickness: Uncoated steel complying with ASTM A 570,
Grade 33; 0.0528-inch (1.35-mm) minimum thickness.
Finish: Unfinished.
Finish: Rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel.
Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M,
Grade 22010).
Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30 (ASTM A 48M,
Class 200), unless another class is indicated or required by
structural loads.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of
sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety
factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47
(ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel.
Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS
specifications for metal alloy welded.
ALUMINUM
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T6.
Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, alloy 6061-T6.
PAINT
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section
"Painting."
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromatefree, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with
performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with
finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound
foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged
exposure.
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
Carboline 621; Carboline Company.
Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670; PPG Industries, Inc.
Tneme-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 7
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for
regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with
SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or coldapplied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
FASTENERS
General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying
with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls.
Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A
(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat
washers.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1
(ASME B18.22M).
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1
(ASME B18.21.2M).
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material
indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed
in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 8
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with
ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with
ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed.
GROUT
Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate
grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended
by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.
Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
CONCRETE FILL
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight,
air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise
indicated.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent
possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm),
unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 9
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of
welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting
structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal
fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive
finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may
accumulate.
Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum
change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of
materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180
deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 10
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth,
using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners
of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least
conspicuous.
STEEL LADDERS
General: Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions,
spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated.
Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.
For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 11
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (12-by-64-mm) steel flat
bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches (457 mm) apart.
Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (10-by-64-mm) steel flat
bars, with eased edges, spaced 16 inches (406 mm) apart.
Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches
(300 mm) o.c.
Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) square steel bars, spaced 12 inches
(300 mm) o.c.
Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on
outer rail faces.
Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches
(1500 mm) o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Size
brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung
with aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by
using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide
grout.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive
material metallically bonded to rung by a proprietary process.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
Mebac; IKG Borden.
SLIP-NOT; W. S. Molnar Company.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 12
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners, in the following
locations:
Exterior.
Interior, where indicated.
LADDER SAFETY CAGES
General: Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3.
Assemble by welding or riveting.
Primary Hoops: 5/16-by-4-inch (8-by-100-mm) steel flat bar hoops.
Provide at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than
20 feet (6 m) o.c.
Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 5/16-by-2-inch (8-by-50-mm) steel
flat bar hoops, spaced not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c.
between primary hoops.
Vertical Bars: 5/16-by-2-inch (8-by-50-mm) steel flat bars secured to
each hoop, spaced approximately 9 inches (230 mm) o.c.
Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent
construction by welding or riveting, unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanize ladder safety cages, including fasteners, in the following
locations:
Exterior.
Interior, where indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 13
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
STEEL SHIP'S LADDERS
Provide ship's ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open-type
construction with structural-steel channel or steel plate
stringers, steel pipe handrails, and steel bar grating treads,
unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for
installation.
Comply with applicable requirements in Division 5 Section "Pipe and
Tube Railings" for steel pipe railings.
Galvanize ship's ladders, including brackets and fasteners, in the following
locations:
Exterior.
Interior, where indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 14
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on
masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor
bolts and for grouting.
Galvanize plates after fabrication.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
Fabricate loose structural-steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of
size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and
partitions at locations indicated.
Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where
indicated.
Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings
equal to one-twelfth of clear span, but not less than 8 inches (200
mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
SHELF ANGLES
Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for
attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted
holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6
inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless
otherwise indicated.
For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles
from backup masonry and concrete. Align expansion joints in
angles with indicated control and expansion joints in cavity-wall
exterior wythe.
Galvanize shelf angles to be installed in exterior walls.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 15
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to
attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of
structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work.
General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as
necessary to complete the Work.
Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of
welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to
sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut,
drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar
items.
Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry,
equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches (32
mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by 8 inches (200 mm) long at
24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
Fabricate supports for operable partitions as follows:
Beams: Continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated with attached
bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom
flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate
holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.
Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous
steel shapes of sizes indicated.
Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated.
Drill girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 16
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill
holes at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction
from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated.
Drill baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts
and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the
same size as pipe wall thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch (12-mm) baseplates with
four 5/8-inch (16-mm) anchor bolts and 1/4-inch (6-mm) top plates.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS
General: Provide prefabricated building columns consisting of loadbearing structural-steel members protected by insulating
concrete fireproofing encased in an outer non-load-bearing steel
shell.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide prefabricated building columns
listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction for ratings indicated, based on
testing according to ASTM E 119.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Four hours.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Three hours.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Two hours.
Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.
Column Configuration: Provide columns of sizes and shapes
indicated. Fabricate connections to comply with details shown
or as needed to suit type of structure indicated.
Concrete Fill: Manufacturer's standard structural concrete, with
minimum compressive strength of 4200 psi (29 MPa), machine
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 17
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
mixed and mechanically vibrated during placement to produce
concrete core free of voids.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering prefabricated building columns that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
prefabricated building columns by one of the following:
Black Rock Column, Inc.
Dean: George H. Dean Inc.
Firetrol Division, Dean Lally L.P.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural-steel
shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously
welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use
concealed field splices where possible.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate
assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors,
welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry
construction, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from each
end, 6 inches (150 mm) from corners, and 24 inches (600 mm)
o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations:
Exterior.
Interior, where indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 18
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
STRUCTURAL-STEEL DOOR FRAMES
Fabricate steel door frames from structural shapes and bars of size
and to dimensions indicated, fully welded together, with 5/8-by1-1/2-inch (16-by-38-mm) steel channel stops, unless otherwise
indicated. Plug-weld built-up members and continuously weld
exposed joints. Secure removable stops to frame with
countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced at not more than
10 inches (250 mm) o.c. Reinforce frames and drill and tap as
necessary to accept finish hardware.
Provide steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 2 inches (3 by 50 mm), with a
minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm)
hook, unless otherwise indicated, for securing door frames into
adjoining concrete or masonry. Weld anchors to frame jambs no
more than 12 inches (300 mm) from both bottom and head of
frame, and space anchors not more than 30 inches (750 mm)
apart.
Extend bottom of frames to floor elevation indicated with steel angle
clips welded to frames for anchoring frame to floor with
expansion shields and bolts.
Galvanize frames in the following locations:
Exterior.
Interior, where indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 19
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
METAL FLOOR PLATE
Fabricate raised-pattern floor plates from rolled-steel floor plate of
thickness indicated below:
Fabricate raised-pattern floor plates from rolled-stainless-steel floor
plate of thickness indicated below:
Fabricate raised-pattern floor plates from rolled-aluminum-alloy
tread plate of thickness indicated below:
Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
Thickness: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm).
Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
Thickness: As indicated.
Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Fabricate from steel plate, of thickness
indicated below, with abrasive granules rolled into surface.
Provide material with coefficient of friction of 0.6 or higher when
tested according to ASTM C 1028.
Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Fabricate from steel plate, of thickness
indicated below, with abrasive material metallically bonded to
steel by a proprietary process. Provide material with coefficient
of friction of 0.6 or higher when tested according to
ASTM C 1028.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 20
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Mebac; IKG Borden.
SLIP-NOT; W. S. Molnar Company.
Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
Thickness: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm).
Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
Thickness: As indicated.
Include steel angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as indicated.
Provide flush steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at
each end of each section.
Include stainless-steel angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as
indicated.
Provide flush stainless-steel bar drop handles for lifting removable
sections, one at each end of each section.
Include aluminum angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as
indicated.
Provide flush aluminum bar drop handles for lifting removable sections,
one at each end of each section.
CAST NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS
Fabricate units of metal indicated below in sizes and configurations indicated
and in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. Provide
units with an integral abrasive finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon
carbide, or a combination of both.
Metal: Cast gray iron, Class 20.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 21
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Metal: Cast aluminum.
Metal: Cast bronze (leaded red or semi-red brass).
Metal: Cast nickel silver (leaded nickel bronze).
Configurations: Provide units in the following configurations, unless
otherwise indicated:
Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 4 inches (100 mm) wide with 1/4-inch (6mm) lip, for casting into concrete steps.
Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 4 inches (100 mm) wide with 1-inch (25mm) lip, for casting into concrete steps.
Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), for
casting into concrete curbs.
Treads: Cross-hatched units, full depth of tread with 3/4-by-3/4-inch
(19-by-19-mm) nosing, for application over bent plate treads or
existing stairs.
Thresholds: Fluted-saddle-type units, 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 1/2
inch (12 mm) high, with tapered edges.
Thresholds: Fluted-interlocking- (hook-strip) type units, 5 inches (125
mm) wide by 5/8 inch (16 mm) high, with tapered edge.
Thresholds: Plain-stepped (stop) type, 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 1/2
inch (12 mm) high, with 1/2-inch (12-mm) step.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 22
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to
units, as standard with manufacturer.
Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate not more than 4 inches
(100 mm) from ends and not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c., evenly
spaced between ends, unless otherwise indicated. Provide closer spacing if
recommended by manufacturer.
Provide two rows of holes for units more than 5 inches (125 mm)
wide, with two holes aligned at ends and intermediate holes
staggered.
Apply bituminous paint to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of units set
into concrete.
Provide a plain surface texture, unless fluted or cross-hatched surfaces are
indicated.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
Amstep Products.
Armstrong Products, Inc.
Balco/Metalines, Inc.
Granite State Casting Co.
Safe-T-Metal Co.
Wooster Products Inc.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 23
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
EXTRUDED NOSINGS AND TREADS
Fabricate units in sizes and configurations indicated and in lengths necessary
to accurately fit openings or conditions. Provide extruded-aluminum units
with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a
combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder.
Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch
(1.5 mm) above aluminum extrusion.
Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs.
Configurations: Provide units in the following configurations, unless
otherwise indicated:
Nosings: Units, 3 inches (75 mm) wide, for casting into concrete steps.
Nosings: Units, 3 inches (75 mm) wide with 1-3/8-inch (35-mm) lip, for
surface mounting on existing stairs.
Nosings: Two-piece units, 3 inches (75 mm) wide, with subchannel for
casting into concrete steps.
Treads: Square-back units, full depth of tread with 1-3/8-inch (35-mm)
lip, for application over existing stairs.
Treads: Beveled-back units, full depth of tread with 1-3/8-inch (35-mm)
lip, for application over existing stairs.
Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to
units, as standard with manufacturer.
Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate not more than 4 inches
(100 mm) from ends and not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c., evenly
spaced between ends, unless otherwise indicated. Provide closer spacing if
recommended by manufacturer.
Provide two rows of holes for units more than 5 inches (125 mm) wide,
with two holes aligned at ends and intermediate holes staggered.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 24
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Apply clear lacquer to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of units set into
concrete.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
Amstep Products.
Armstrong Products, Inc.
Balco/Metalines, Inc.
Granite State Casting Co.
Safe-T-Metal Co.
Wooster Products Inc.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 25
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
PIPE GUARDS
Provide pipe guards of 3-by-3-by-5/16-inch (76-by-76-by-8-mm) steel angles,
extending from floor to 42 inches (1100 mm) above floor, with 3/8-inch (10mm) steel baseplates for bolting to floor. Provide at least two vertical angles
at each location, except at internal corners where one may be used. Connect
tops of angles and anchor to wall or column with 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm)
steel strap braces welded to angles and bolted to wall.
Galvanize pipe guards after fabrication.
WHEEL GUARDS
Provide wheel guards of 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, hollow-core, gray-iron
castings; of size and shape indicated. Provide holes for countersunk anchor
bolts and grouting.
PIPE BOLLARDS
Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.
Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) minimum steel plate.
Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting
to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch (19-mm)
anchor bolts.
Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle
baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 26
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4-inch (6-mm)
thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve.
Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe
or 1/4-inch (6-mm) wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)
less than ID of bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 1/2-inch (12-mm)
steel machine bolt.
FINISHES, GENERAL
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable
standard listed below:
ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to
comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surfacepreparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed
metal fabrications:
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those
with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on
fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPCPA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 27
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured,
polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long
dimension of each piece.
Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated,
unspecified).
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish:
nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic
Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying
with AAMA 607.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
List Level 3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners
where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction.
Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts,
through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting
required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 28
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb,
true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be
built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld
connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for
bolted or screwed field connections.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of
welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 29
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come
into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a
heavy coat of bituminous paint.
SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials,
and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After
bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of
bearing plate before packing with grout.
Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed
locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no
voids remain.
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items
being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and
requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if any.
Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from
building structure.
Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe
columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or
concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.
Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated at girders supported
on concrete or masonry, install as specified above for setting and
grouting bearing and leveling plates.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 30
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position
and grout column baseplates as specified above for setting and grouting
bearing and leveling plates.
Do not grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders until girders
are installed and leveled.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 31
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
INSTALLING PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS
Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC S335 and with
requirements of the testing and inspecting agency that apply to fire-resistance
rating indicated.
INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS
Install with anchorage system indicated to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
Center nosings on tread widths.
For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with
riser faces and level with tread surfaces.
Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to provide a watertight installation.
INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS
Install pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes in parking garage where not
protected by curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to floor and wall or
column with drilled-in expansion anchors.
INSTALLING WHEEL GUARDS
Anchor wheel guards to concrete or masonry construction to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Fill cores solidly with concrete.
INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS
Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into
concrete. After bollards have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space
between bollard and sleeve solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed
and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope
grout up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward bollard.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 32
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 8
inches (200 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (19 mm) greater than OD of bollard. After
bollards have been inserted into holes, fill annular space surrounding bollard
solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with
grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8
inch (3 mm) toward bollard.
Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Support and brace bollards
in position in footing excavations until concrete has been placed and cured.
Anchor bollards to existing construction with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
Provide four 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchors at each bollard, unless otherwise
indicated. Embed anchors at least 4 inches (100 mm) in existing concrete.
Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in concrete by inserting into
pipe sleeves preset into concrete. After internal sleeves have been inserted,
fill annular space between sleeves solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout,
mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions.
Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward internal sleeve.
Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in formed or core-drilled
holes not less than 8 inches (200 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (19 mm) greater than
OD of sleeve. After sleeves have been inserted into holes, fill annular space
surrounding sleeves solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and
placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout
up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward sleeve.
Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete
footings. Support and brace sleeves in position in footing excavations until
concrete has been placed and cured.
Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 1/2-inch
(12-mm) machine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill
holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner will furnish padlocks.
Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface.
Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 33
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with
the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for
touching up shop-painted surfaces.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9
Section "Painting."
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 34
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART I-
GENERAL
1.0 SUMMARY
A. Preparing substrate surfaces.
B. Sealant and joint backing.
1.1 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
B. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.
C.
ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
D. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 01.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance
criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and
perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B.
Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum five years experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three
years experience
1.
Service Temperature Range
2.
Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35
3.
-40 to 180 degrees F
Location: Exterior and interior faces of exterior walls; door, and window
frames between wall and frame. hane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P,
Class 25, Use T, taining, non-bleeding, self-levelling type; color(s) as selected;
R-200 Urexpan", Sonneborne "SL 2", Tremco "THC-900/901 ", 25 percent -40
to 180 degrees F 20 to 35 Exterior walks and interior floor joints. Silicone
Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, le component, non-acid
curing, non-sagging, non-staining, Bostik "Chem-Calls 1200", Dow Corning
JOINT SEALER
07900-1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
C.
D.
E.
BFL OWEN
"795", GE Silicones neborn "Omniseal", Tremco "Spectrem I", or equal. 25
percent -65 to 180 degrees F 15 to 35 Exterior and interior vertical joints in
masonry and concrete.
Multi-Component Pourable Polyure M, and A; multi-component, non- Bostik "ChemCalk 550", Pecora " or equal.
1.
Elongation Capability
2.
Service Temperature Range
3.
Shore A Hardness Range
4.
Location:
Single Component Non-Acid Curing Use NT, M, G, A and O; sin non-bleeding; color(s)
as selected; "Silpruf', Pecora "895 Silicone", So
1.
Elongation Capability
2.
Service Temperature Range
3.
Shore A Hardness Range
4.
Location:
Single Component Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A and O; single component, fungus resistant; non-sagging, nonstaining, non-bleeding; white color; Dow Corning "786", GE Silicones "Sanitary 1700",
or equal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
D.
Elongation Capability: 25 percent
Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F
Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35
Location: Sealing around interior joints with nonporous substrates around sinks,
plumbing fixtures,
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G.
Tool joints concave. 3.4 CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of 01710.
B.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01700.
JOINT SEALER
07900-2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
B.
BFL OWEN
Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALER
07900-3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Metal framing and furring.
Metal lath and accessories.
Plastic accessories.
Portland cement plaster.
Stucco finishes.
Acrylic-based finishes.
Portland cement plaster with embedded, exposed aggregate (marblecrete).
Sgraffito designs in colored portland cement plaster.
Related Sections:
Section:
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
1.
Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel studs
and joists.
2.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring.
3.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing installed behind
metal lath.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for each product specified.
C.
Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of
actual units or sections of units at least 12 inches (300 mm) square showing the full
range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of finish indicated.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
2.
1.4
Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets
composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected.
Include similar Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color
selection.
D.
Samples for verification in units at least 12 inches (300 mm) square of each type of
finish indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full
range of variations expected in these characteristics.
E.
Material Certificates: Submit certificate signed by manufacturer for each kind of plaster
aggregate certifying that materials comply with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated portland cement plaster
assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Mockups: Prior to installing plaster work, construct panels for each type of finish and
application required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build
mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final
unit of Work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not
indicated, as directed by Architect.
Erect mockups 48 by 48 inches (1200 by 1200 mm) by full thickness in presence
of Architect using materials, including lath, support system, and control joints,
indicated for final Work.
Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of plaster Work.
Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as
a standard for judging the completed portland cement plaster Work.
a.
1.5
BFL OWEN
When directed, remove mockups from Project site.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver cementitious materials to Project site in original packages, containers, or
bundles, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name, and lot number.
B.
Store materials inside, under cover, and dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other
causes.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.6
BFL OWEN
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster
application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental
conditions before, during, and after plaster application.
B.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Provide heat and protection, temporary or permanent, as
required to protect each coat of plaster from freezing for at least 24 hours after
application. Distribute heat uniformly to prevent concentration of heat on plaster near
heat sources; provide deflection or protective screens.
C.
Warm-Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation
and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as
required by climatic and job conditions to prevent dry out during cure period. Provide
suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or combinations of
these, as required.
D.
Exterior Plaster Work: Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is below 40
deg F (4 deg C).
E.
Exterior Plaster Work: Protect plaster against freezing when ambient temperature is
below 40 deg F (4 deg C) by heating materials and providing temporary protection and
heat as required by ACI 306R.
F.
Interior Plaster Work: Maintain at least 50 deg F (10 deg C) temperature in areas to be
plastered for at least 48 hours before, during, and after application.
G.
Ventilation: Provide natural or mechanical means of ventilation to properly dry interior
spaces after portland cement plaster has cured.
H.
Protect contiguous work from soiling and moisture deterioration caused by plastering.
Provide temporary covering and other provisions necessary to minimize harmful
spattering of plaster on other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Metal Framing and Supports:
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
Davis Wire Corporation.
Jaenson Wire Company.
Keystone Steel & Wire Co.
K-Lath Building Products.
Metal Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
5.
Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO).
California Expanded Metal Products Co.
Dale//Incor Industries, Inc.
Dietrich Industries, Inc.
National Gypsum Co.
Unimast, Inc.
United States Gypsum Co.
Western Metal Lath Co.
Wire-Fabric Lath:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO).
American Studco, Inc.
Angeles Metal Systems.
California Expanded Metal Products Co.
Clark Steel Framing, Inc.
Consolidated Systems, Inc.
Dale//Incor Industries, Inc.
Dietrich Industries, Inc.
Marino-Ware Industries.
National Gypsum Co.
Unimast, Inc.
Western Metal Lath Co.
Expanded-Metal Lath:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
BFL OWEN
Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO).
California Expanded Metal Products Co.
Dale//Incor Industries, Inc.
Delta Star, Inc.
Flannery, Inc.
Fry Reglet Corporation.
Gordon, Inc.
Metalex (Keene Products).
MM Systems Corp.
National Gypsum Co.
Pittcon Industries.
Stockton Products.
Unimast, Inc.
United States Gypsum Co.
Western Metal Lath Co.
Plastic Accessories:
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
a.
b.
c.
6.
California Stucco Products Corp.
Florida Stucco Corp.
Highland Stucco.
IPA Systems, Inc.
United States Gypsum Co.
Acrylic-Based Finishes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.2
Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO).
Plastic Components, Inc.
Vinyl Corp.
Stucco:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
7.
BFL OWEN
Bonsal: W.R. Bonsal Co.
Dryvit Systems, Inc.
EIFS Incorporated.
Parex Incorporated.
Pleko Products, Inc.
Quikrete Companies (The).
Senergy, Inc.
Simplex Products Div.; Anthony Industries, Inc.
Sto Industries.
Stuc-O-Flex International.
Thoro System Products.
METAL SUPPORTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A.
General: Size metal ceiling supports to comply with ASTM C 1063, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hanger
wires; and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed
by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
2.
3.
Cast-in-place type designed for attachment to concrete forms.
Chemical anchor.
Expansion anchor.
C.
Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
D.
Rod Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated.
E.
Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
F.
Channels: Cold-rolled steel, minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick base (uncoated)
metal and 7/16-inch- (11.1-mm-) wide flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Carrying Channels: 2-inch- (50-mm-) deep-by-19/32-inch- (15-mm-) wide
flanges, 590 lb/1000 feet (0.87 kg/m).
Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) deep, 475 lb/1000 feet (0.7 kg/m).
Furring Channels: 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep, 300 lb/1000 feet (0.45 kg/m).
Finish: Rust-inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated.
Finish: ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180) hot-dip galvanized coating
for framing where indicated.
Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90
degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) wide minimum lip (return), and
complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated)
metal and for depth:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.3
BFL OWEN
Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.455 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Thickness: As indicated.
Depth: 1-5/8 inches (41.3 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: As indicated.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40 (ASTM A 653M, Z90) galvanized
coating.
Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.
STEEL STUDS AND RUNNERS
A.
General: Provide steel studs and runners complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Protective Coating:
ASTM A 653, G40 (ASTM A 653M, Z90) hot-dip
galvanized coating.
Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.
Protective Coating:
ASTM A 653, G40 (ASTM A 653M, Z90) hot-dip
galvanized coating for framing members of exterior walls and within 10 feet (3
m) of exterior walls.
Non-Load-Bearing Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645 and complying with the following
requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and other characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.455 mm).
Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm).
Thickness: 0.0341 inch (0.866 mm).
Thickness: As indicated.
Depth: 1-5/8 inches (41.3 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: 4 inches (101.6 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
9.
10.
C.
Depth: 6 inches (152.4 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: As indicated.
Load-Bearing Studs and Runners: ASTM C 955 and complying with the following
requirements for structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet of grades
indicated below, design thickness of base (uncoated) metal, and other dimensional
characteristics:
1.
System Performance: Provide studs and runners with a configuration and steel
thickness capable of carrying the following transverse design loads, where
indicated, without exceeding the allowable stress of steel or the following
allowable design deflection:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
2.4
BFL OWEN
Design Wind Load: 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa) inward and outward.
Allowable Design Deflection: L/360.
Grade 33 (Grade 230) for thickness of 0.0329 inch (0.836 mm) or less.
Grade 40 (Grade 275) for thickness of 0.0428 inch (1.087 mm) or more.
Grade 50 (Grade 340) Class 1 for thickness of 0.0428 inch (1.087 mm) or more.
Thickness: 0.0359 inch (0.836 mm).
Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.087 mm).
Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.367 mm).
Thickness: 0.0677 inch (1.720 mm).
Thickness: 0.0966 inch (2.454 mm).
Thickness: As indicated.
Flange Width: 1-3/8 inches (34.9 mm).
Flange Width: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm).
Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41.3 mm).
Flange Width: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).
Depth: 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: 4 inches (101.6 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: 6 inches (152.4 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: 8 inches (203.2 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Depth: As indicated.
VERTICAL METAL FURRING
A.
General: Provide vertical furring complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Protective Coating:
ASTM A 653, G40 (ASTM A 653M, Z90) hot-dip
galvanized coating.
Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.
Protective Coating:
ASTM A 653, G40 (ASTM A 653M, Z90) hot-dip
galvanized coating for framing members attached to and within 10 feet (3 m) of
exterior walls.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 7
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.5
BFL OWEN
B.
Channel Furring and Braces: Cold-rolled steel, minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick
base (uncoated) metal and 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) deep-by-7/16-inch- (11.1-mm-) wide
flanges, 300 lb/1000 feet (0.45 kg/m).
C.
Hat Channels: Hat-shaped screwable furring channels, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep, formed
from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, minimum 0.0179 inch (0.455 mm) thick,
Grade 33.
D.
Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard screw-type Z-shaped furring members
formed from minimum 0.0179-inch- (0.455-mm-) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet designed for mechanical attachment of insulation boards or blankets to monolithic
concrete and masonry walls.
E.
Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type, minimum 0.0329-inch- (0.836-mm-) thick base
(uncoated) metal, adjustable from 1/4- to 2-1/4-inch (6.4- to 57.1-mm) wall clearance for
channel furring.
LATH
A.
Expanded-Metal Lath: Comply with ASTM C 847 for material, type, configuration, and
other characteristics indicated below.
1.
Material: Fabricate expanded-metal lath from sheet metal conforming to the
following:
a.
b.
2.
Galvanized Steel: Structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180)
minimum coating designation, unless otherwise indicated.
Uncoated Steel: Commercial-quality, cold-rolled carbon-steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), coated with asphalt or
non-reemulsifiable water-base paint.
Diamond-Mesh Lath: Comply with the following requirements:
a.
Configuration: Flat.
1)
2)
b.
Configuration: Self-furring.
1)
2)
3.
Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m).
Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m).
Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m).
Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m).
Rib Lath: Comply with the following requirements:
a.
Configuration: Flat, rib depth of not over 1/8 inch (3 mm).
1)
Weight: 2.75 lb/sq. yd. (1.5 kg/sq. m).
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 8
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2)
b.
Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m).
Configuration: Rib depth of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
1)
2)
Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m).
Weight: 4 lb/sq. yd. (2.2 kg/sq. m).
B.
Woven-Wire Lath: ASTM C 1032, fabricated into 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) hexagonalshaped mesh with minimum 0.0510-inch- (1.3-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel wire.
C.
Welded-Wire Lath: ASTM C 933, fabricated into 2-by-2-inch (50-by-50-mm) openings
with minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel wire.
D.
Paper Backing: Where paper-backed lath is indicated, provide the following material
factory bonded to back of lath. Comply with FS UU-B-790, Type I, grade and style as
indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
BFL OWEN
Vapor-Permeable Paper: Grade D, Style 2.
Vapor-Retardant Paper: Grade B, Style 1A.
Vapor-Retardant Paper: Grade B, Style 1 with flame-spread rating of 25 per
ASTM E 84.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements
indicated below; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster
coats required.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Aluminum Components:
Alloy, temper, and finish recommended by
manufacturer with not less than the strength and durability properties of
aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for alloy
and temper 6063-T5.
Galvanized Steel Components: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G40 (ASTM A 653M, Z90) minimum
coating designation.
Zinc-Alloy Components: ASTM B 69, 99 percent pure zinc.
Plastic Components: ASTM D 4216, high-impact polyvinyl chloride (PVC) for
building products.
B.
Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large-mesh, diamond-metal lath fabricated
from zinc-alloy or welded-wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475-inch- (1.2-mm-) diameter,
zinc-coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners of
portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement.
C.
Cornerbeads: Small nose cornerbeads fabricated from the following metal, with
expanded flanges of large-mesh diamond-metal lath allowing full plaster encasement.
1.
2.
Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick.
PVC Plastic: Minimum 0.035 inch (0.89 mm) thick.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 9
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.
4.
5.
D.
Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick.
Aluminum: Minimum 0.050 inch (1.2 mm) thick.
Material: Any material above.
Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges of the following material:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick.
PVC Plastic: Minimum 0.035 inch (0.89 mm) thick.
Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick.
Aluminum: Minimum 0.050 inch (1.2 mm) thick.
Material: Any material above.
E.
Curved Casing Beads: Square-edged style, fabricated from aluminum coated with clear
plastic, preformed into curve of radius indicated.
F.
Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick.
PVC Plastic: Minimum 0.035 inch (0.89 mm) thick.
Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick.
Aluminum: Minimum 0.050 inch (1.2 mm) thick.
Material: Any material above.
One-Piece Type:
Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in M-shaped
configuration, with expanded or perforated flanges.
Two-Piece Type: Pair of casing beads with back flanges formed to provide slipjoint action, adjustable for joint widths from 1/8 to 5/8 inch (3 to 16 mm).
a.
2.7
BFL OWEN
Provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints.
G.
Foundation Sill (Weep) Screed: Manufacturer's standard profile designed for use at sill
plate line to form plaster stop and prevent plaster from contacting damp earth, fabricated
from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
H.
Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations
indicated.
PLASTER MATERIALS
A.
Base-Coat Cements: Type as indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I.
Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type II.
Masonry cement, ASTM C 91, Type N.
Plastic cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except for limitations on insoluble
residue, air entrainment, and additions subsequent to calcination and with
maximum plasticizing agent content not exceeding 12 percent of total volume.
Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Cement: Material and color as indicated below:
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 10
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I.
Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type II.
Masonry cement, ASTM C 91, Type N.
Plastic cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except for limitations on insoluble
residue, air entrainment, and additions subsequent to calcination and with
maximum plasticizing agent content not exceeding 12 percent of total volume.
C.
Cement Color: White.
D.
Cement Color: Gray.
E.
Cement Color: Pigmented, factory-packaged standard product consisting of white or
gray cement combined with colorfast mineral pigments.
1.
2.
Provide color to match Architect's sample.
Provide color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
F.
Stucco Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard factory-packaged stucco, including
portland cement, aggregate, coloring agent, and other proprietary ingredients.
G.
Acrylic-Based Finish Coat: Factory-mixed formulation of acrylic emulsion, colorfast
mineral pigments, and fine aggregates specifically recommended by acrylic-based finish
manufacturer for use over portland cement plaster base coats.
H.
Factory-Prepared Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard factory-packaged blend of
portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or III; hydrated lime, Type S, ASTM C 206 or
ASTM C 207; aggregate, ASTM C 897; and compatible with base coat and finish texture
indicated; in color indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
White.
Color as indicated, manufacturer's standard product consisting of white or gray
cement combined with colorfast mineral pigments and aggregates selected for
color.
Provide color to match Architect's sample.
Provide color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
I.
Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S; or special
hydrated lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C 207, Type S.
J.
Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897.
K.
Aggregate for Finish Coats: ASTM C 897 system and as indicated below:
1.
2.
2.8
BFL OWEN
Manufactured or natural sand, white in color.
Manufactured or natural sand, in color matching Architect's sample.
EXPOSED AGGREGATES
A.
Marble Chips: Clean, sound, crushed marble of color and size gradation indicated.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 11
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
B.
2.9
BFL OWEN
Provide color and size gradation as required to produce match with Architect's sample
and field-erected mockup.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm)
long, free of contaminates, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.
B.
Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable.
C.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932.
D.
Acid-Etching Solution: Muriatic acid (10 percent solution of commercial hydrochloric
acid) mixed 1 part to not less than 6 nor more than 10 parts water.
E.
Dash-Coat Material: 2 parts portland cement to 3 parts fine sand, mixed with water to a
mushy-paste consistency.
F.
Asphalt-Saturated Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), nonperforated.
G.
Line Wire: 0.0475-inch- (1.2-mm-) diameter, zinc-coated (galvanized), soft, annealed
steel wire.
H.
Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for fastening metal lath to wood or
steel members less than 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) thick.
I.
Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening metal lath to steel members
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
J.
Thermal Insulation: Material as indicated below, of thickness and width to fill voids
formed by Z-furring members:
1.
Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Combine mineral fibers of type
described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for
Type I (blankets without membrane facing) and as follows:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock
wool.
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular, polystyrene thermal
insulation formed from a polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using
hydrochlorofluorocarbons as the blowing agent to comply with ASTM C 578 for
Type IV, and with the following surface-burning characteristics:
a.
Flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of 75 and 450, respectively,
according to ASTM E 84.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 12
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
K.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by
combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply
with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing), of widths to
completely fill void formed by framing members, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.10
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following
requirements:
1.
Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter
joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
B.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
Manufacturer's standard nondrying,
nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant
recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound
transmission.
C.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
D.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
c.
2.
a.
b.
2.11
BFL OWEN
PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc., Contech Brands.
AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
BA-98; Pecora Corp.
Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc.
PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for base- and finish-coat mixes as applicable to
plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated.
B.
Base-Coat Mixes and Compositions: Proportion materials for respective base coats in
parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 13
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
following requirements for each method of application and plaster base indicated.
Adjust mix proportions below within limits specified to attain workability.
C.
Fiber Content: Add fiber to following mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2
minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions but do not exceed 1
lb/cu. ft. (16 kg/cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities
accordingly to maintain workability.
D.
Three-Coat Work over Metal Lath: Base-coat proportions as indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
E.
Two-Coat Work over Concrete Unit Masonry:
below:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts
aggregate.
Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts aggregate.
Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts
aggregate.
Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts
aggregate.
Scratch Coat: 1 part masonry cement, 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Brown Coat: 1 part masonry cement, 3 to 5 parts aggregate.
Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 1 to 2 parts masonry cement, 2-1/2 to 4
parts aggregate.
Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 1 to 2 parts masonry cement, 3 to 5 parts
aggregate.
Scratch Coat: 1 part plastic cement, 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Brown Coat: 1 part plastic cement, 3 to 5 parts aggregate.
Scratch Coat: 1 part plastic cement, 1 part portland cement, 2-1/2 to 4 parts
aggregate.
Brown Coat: 1 part plastic cement, 1 part portland cement, 3 to 5 parts
aggregate.
Base-coat proportions as indicated
Base Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 to 4 parts
aggregate.
Base Coat: 1 part masonry cement, 3 to 4 parts aggregate.
Base Coat: 1 part plastic cement, 3 to 4 parts aggregate.
Job-Mixed Finish Coats: Proportion materials for finish coats in parts by volume for
cementitious materials and parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials to comply
with the following requirements:
1.
Proportions using sand aggregates as indicated below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 parts sand.
1 part plastic cement, 1-1/2 parts sand.
1 part portland cement, 1 part masonry cement, 3 parts sand.
1 part portland cement, 1-1/2 to 2 parts lime, 3 parts sand.
1 part masonry cement, 1-1/2 parts sand.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 14
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.
Proportions using perlite aggregates as indicated below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.12
BFL OWEN
1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 2 parts perlite.
1 part plastic cement, 1 part perlite.
1 part portland cement, 1 part masonry cement, 2 parts perlite.
1 part portland cement, 1-1/2 to 2 parts lime, 2-1/2 parts perlite.
1 part masonry cement, 1-1/2 parts perlite.
G.
Factory-Prepared Finish Coats: Add water only; comply with finish coat manufacturer's
written instructions.
H.
Stucco Finish Coat:
instructions.
I.
Acrylic-Based Finish Coat: Apply material as factory packaged; do not add other
ingredients; comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Add water only; comply with stucco manufacturer's written
MIXING
A.
Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with
applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF LATH AND FURRING, GENERAL
A.
Standards: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and
Furring," and with requirements of ASTM C 1063.
B.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in work and for
support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, handrails, furnishings, and
similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply
with applicable written instructions of lath and furring manufacturer.
C.
Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally
and where partition or wall abuts overhead structure, sufficiently isolate from structural
movement to prevent transfer of loading from building structure. Install slip- or cushiontype joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support.
1.
D.
Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge joints with
furring and lathing or accessories.
Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath, and beads, as required to form openings
and frames for other work as indicated. Coordinate support system for proper support of
framed work that is not indicated to be supported independently of metal furring and
lathing system.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 15
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.2
INSTALLATION OF CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Preparation and Coordination: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with
installation of overhead structural systems to ensure inserts and other structural
anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers in a manner that will
develop their full strength and at spacings required to support ceiling.
1.
B.
C.
Furnish concrete inserts, and other anchorage devices indicated, to other trades
for installations well in advance of time needed for coordination with other
work.
Hanger Installation: Attach hangers to structure above ceiling to comply with
ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and with referenced
standards.
1.
Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs.
Install ceiling suspension system components of sizes and spacings indicated, but not in
smaller sizes or greater spacings than those required by referenced lathing and furring
installation standards.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
BFL OWEN
Wire Hangers: Space 0.16-inch- (4-mm-) diameter wire hangers not over 48
inches (1219 mm) o.c., parallel with and not over 36 inches (914 mm)
perpendicular to direction of carrying channels, unless otherwise indicated, and
within 6 inches (152 mm) of carrying channel ends.
Carrying Channels: Space carrying channels not over 36 inches (914 mm) o.c.
with 48-inch (1219-mm) o.c. hanger spacing.
Furring Channels to Receive Metal Lath: Space furring channels not over 16
inches (406 mm) o.c. for 3.4-lb/sq. yd. (1.8-kg/sq. m) diamond-mesh lath, 19
inches (483 mm) o.c. for 3.4-lb/sq. yd. (1.8-kg/sq. m) flat rib lath, or 24 inches
(609 mm) o.c. for 3.4-lb/sq. yd. (1.8-kg/sq. m), 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rib lath.
INSTALLATION OF STEEL STUD WALL AND PARTITION SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A.
General: Install components of systems to comply with written instructions of steel stud
manufacturer for applications indicated and as follows:
1.
2.
B.
For non-load-bearing stud systems, comply with ASTM C 754.
For load-bearing stud systems, comply with ASTM C 1007 and as indicated.
Steel Stud Systems to Receive Metal Lath: Comply with requirements of ML/SFA 920,
"Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," applicable to each installation
condition and type of metal stud system indicated.
1.
Extend and attach partition support systems to structure above suspended
ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 16
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.
3.4
3.5
BFL OWEN
Extend partition support systems to finish ceilings and attach to ceiling
suspension members, unless otherwise indicated.
INSTALLATION OF VERTICAL METAL FURRING
A.
Install vertical metal furring components of sizes and spacings indicated, but not in
smaller sizes or greater spacings than those required by referenced ML/SFA standard.
B.
For furring on interior side of exterior walls, provide furring brackets, unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Metal Furring to Receive Metal Lath: Comply with requirements of ML/SFA 920,
"Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," applicable to each installation
condition indicated.
D.
Z-Furring with Thermal Insulation: Erect thermal insulation vertically and hold in place
with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (609 mm) o.c. Except at external corners,
securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails or
powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (609 mm) o.c. At external corners, attach
wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on
adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached
channel. Start from this furring channel with standard-width insulation panel and
continue in regular manner. At internal corners, space second member no more than 12
inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit. Until plaster base is installed,
hold insulation in place with 10-inch- (254-mm-) long staples fabricated from 0.04-inch
(1-mm) tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member.
LATHING
A.
Install metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required.
Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials
indicated that comply with referenced ML/SFA specifications and ASTM lathing
installation standards.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Suspended and furred ceilings using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. (1.8-kg/sq. m) minimum
weight, diamond-mesh lath.
Vertical metal framing and furring using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. (1.8-kg/sq. m) minimum
weight, diamond-mesh lath and cold-rolled channel stud framing.
Ceramic-tile setting beds using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. (1.8-kg/sq. m) minimum weight,
diamond-mesh lath.
Exterior sheathed wall surfaces using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. (1.8-kg/sq. m) minimum
weight, self-furring, diamond-mesh lath.
Exterior sheathed wall surfaces using woven-wire lath with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)
hexagonal-shaped mesh with minimum 0.0510-inch- (1.3-mm-) diameter,
galvanized steel wire.
Monolithic surfaces using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. (1.8-kg/sq. m) minimum weight, selffurring, diamond-mesh lath or vertical metal framing and furring as required for
plaster thickness.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 17
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.6
3.7
BFL OWEN
PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING
A.
Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing loose
material and substances that may impair the Work.
B.
Etch concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct plaster application.
Scrub with acid-etching solution on previously wetted surface and rinse thoroughly with
clean water. Repeat application, if necessary, to obtain adequate suction and mechanical
bond of plaster (where dash coat, bonding agent, or additive is not used).
C.
Apply bonding agent on concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces indicated for direct
plaster application; comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application.
D.
Apply dash coat on concrete surfaces indicated for direct plaster application. Moist-cure
dash coat for at least 24 hours after application and before plastering.
E.
Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true
surfaces; coordinate with scratch-coat work.
F.
Refer to Division 6 Sections for installing permanent wood grounds, if any.
G.
Flashing: Refer to Division 7 Sections for installing flashing as indicated.
H.
Surface Conditioning: Immediately before plastering, dampen concrete and concrete
unit masonry surfaces that are indicated for direct plaster application, except where a
bonding agent has been applied. Determine and apply amount of moisture and degree of
saturation that will result in optimum suction for plastering.
INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision
and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at
corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster
bases to hold accessories in place and in alignment during plastering. Install accessories
of type indicated at following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
External Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners.
External Corners: Bend lath around external angles without using cornerbeads
or reinforcement.
Terminations of Plaster: Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated.
Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations
complying with the following criteria and approved by Architect:
a.
b.
Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of
construction directly behind plaster membrane.
Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet (5.4 m) in either
direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 18
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
c.
d.
e.
3.8
3.9
BFL OWEN
Wall Areas: Not more than 144 sq. ft. (13 sq. m).
Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in area.
Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width
or height of plaster membrane.
INSTALLATION OF SOUND-RATED PLASTER WORK
A.
Where sound-rated plaster work is indicated by Sound Transmission Class (STC) ratings
or other notation, seal work at perimeters, control joints, openings, and penetrations with
a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Comply with ASTM C 919 and plaster
manufacturer's written instructions for location of sealant beads.
B.
Install sound attenuation blankets within stud cavities of sound-rated partition assemblies
where indicated.
PLASTER APPLICATION
A.
Plaster Application Standard:
comply with ASTM C 926.
Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to
B.
Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign
materials.
C.
Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
D.
Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m) from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot (3-m)
straightedge placed at any location on surface.
E.
Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with
base-coat plaster material, and before lathing where necessary. Except where full
grouting is indicated or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches (152
mm) at each jamb anchor.
F.
Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that
neither will be damaged by installation of other.
G.
Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a
plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated at
metal frame by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and
groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
H.
Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with
cornerbeads on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work.
I.
Number of Coats: Apply plaster of composition indicated, to comply with the following
requirements:
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 19
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
Three Coats: Over the following plaster base:
a.
2.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Float Finish: Apply finish coat to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) to
completely cover base coat, uniformly floated to a true even plane with finetextured finish matching Architect's sample.
Trowel-Textured Finish: Apply finish coat with hand-troweled-textured finish
matching Architect's sample.
Dash Finish: Machine-apply finish-coat plaster in 2 coats evenly and uniformly
to produce textured finish matching Architect's sample.
Prepared Finish: Apply stucco finish coats, acrylic-based finish coats, and other
factory-prepared finish coats according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Exposed-Aggregate Finish (Marblecrete): Apply bedding coat of finish-coat
plaster to not less than the following thickness and straighten to a true,
reasonably smooth surface with rod and darby; allow bedding coat to set up until
its consistency permits application of exposed aggregate. Apply aggregate to
perimeter of panel areas and work toward center of panels; tamp lightly and
evenly to achieve embedment and to bring surface to even plane matching
Architect's sample.
a.
b.
6.
3.10
Concrete unit masonry.
Concrete, cast-in-place or precast when surface condition complies with
ASTM C 926 for plaster bonded to solid base.
Finish Coats: Apply finish coats to comply with the following requirements:
1.
K.
Metal lath.
Two Coats: Over the following plaster bases:
a.
b.
J.
BFL OWEN
Bedding-Coat Thickness: Not less than 3/8 inch (9 mm) for maximum
exposed-aggregate size of 1/2 inch (13 mm) or less.
Bedding-Coat Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) for maximum
exposed-aggregate size of 5/8 inch (16 mm).
Sgraffito-Design Plaster Finish: Where indicated, install sgraffito design as
detailed. Limit each application to an area that can be successfully and
completely executed before finish coats harden. Omit brown coat and install
finish coats over scratch coat of minimum thickness. Provide specially
formulated plaster mix and apply separate coat for each color required, not
exceeding 1/4-inch (6-mm) thickness for each coat. Transfer pattern to surface
by use of template. Remove layers in each area of pattern as required to expose
finish coat of indicated color.
Moist-cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including written
instructions for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations."
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 20
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
A.
3.11
BFL OWEN
Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work.
Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster surfaces around items that
are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters,
buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects.
Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster
on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces
not to be plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during
plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials,
containers, equipment, and plaster debris.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and Installer, that ensure plaster work is without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 21
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
Surface preparation for the painting of all exterior/interior items, concrete,
masonry, gypsum board and metals not covered under Section 09870-Steel
Coating System, as required to complete the work of this section. Work
includes the following:
1. Exterior Painting:
a.
Concrete columns and walls including returns, express ramp wall surfaces, spandrels and parapet from top interior surface to drip at
bottom, except precast concrete wall panels that are indicated as exposed / non-painted.
b. Masonry walls that are required to have a smooth cement plaster parge coat finish. Splitfaced, scored, integral colored, etched, etc. shall be left exposed I non-painted.
c. Cement plaster finish coating
d. Miscellaneous exterior metal not painted with the steel coating system.
e. Edges of raised concrete curbs / islands
2. Interior Painting:
a.
All beams, girders and slab soffits.
b. All columns, interior color-coded.
c. Masonry surfaces of exterior walls of electrical, mechanical rooms, etc.
d. Plaster surfaces.
e. Gypsum board walls and ceilings.
f.
Back priming of cabinet work.
g. Exposed pipes, conduits, sheet metal items, ducts, etc., including at roof.
h. Stairway markings.
i.
1.2
Interior surfaces of elevator shaft where exposed to view (as applicable).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PAINTING
09900-1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
A.Provide finish coats that are compatible with the prime coats actually used.
B.
Correct any defect or other unsatisfactory conditions prior to painting.
C.
Comply with state, local and AQMD regulations governing the use of paint materials.
1.3
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply paints when temperature of surfaces to be painted and the
surrounding air temperatures are below 50°F, unless otherwise permitted
by the manufacturers printed instructions and as acceptable to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURE
A.
Products as manufactured by Dunn Edwards, Frazee, ICI/Dulux or
Sherwin Williams. Equivalent alternate product as manufactured by
Tnemec, ‘Tenemecrete’ will be acceptable if approved by the University’s
Representative.
2.2
A.
MATERIALS
Materials for undercoats and finish coats of paint shall be ready-mixed and shall not be changed, except
thinning of undercoats (when required), or coloring, any of which shall be in strict accord with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
B.
System Description:
1. Substrate
a. Concrete I Plaster: Sheen shall be Egg-Shell Interior / Flat Exterior, unless indicated
otherwise by the University’s Representative.
i. 1st Coat: Single Component Epoxy Fortified
ii. 2nd Coat: Single Component 100% Premium Acrylic Paint
iii. 3rd Coat: Single Component 100% Premium Acrylic Paint
b. Masonry: Exposed / non-painted surfaces are to be treated under the scope of work
of Section 07180
i. 1st Coat: Single Component Vinyl I Acrylic Block Filler
ii. 2nd Coat: Single Component 100% Premium Acrylic Paint
PAINTING
09900-2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
iii. 3rd Coat: Single Component 100% Premium Acrylic Paint
c. Miscellaneous Metals Surfaces not indicated under the scope of work for Section
09870.
i. 1st Coat: Single Component Alkyd Primer (white or light gray)
ii. 2nd Coat: Single Component Alkyd Paint — Semi Gloss
iii. 3rd Coat: Single Component Alkyd Paint — Semi Gloss
2.3
COLOR SCHEDULES
A.
The University’s Representative will prepare a color schedule for guidance
in painting.
B. Contractor shall provide for a different color of paint to be used around the top 4-0” of selected
interior columns for color-coding graphics on each elevated level of the structure. Refer to
Section 10410-Non-Illuminated Signage and Graphics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCAFFOLDING
A.
Furnish and maintain scaffolding and similar temporary work necessary
for execution of work.
3.2
A.
Surfaces to be clean and dry when paint is applied. Rooms in which painting is to be started shall
be swept clean, dusted and then all surfaces wiped with a damp cloth to remove dust and dirt.
B.
On miscellaneous metal surfaces, work includes for the touching up shop prime coats, as required.
C.
Where hot-dip galvanized or electro-zinc plated surfaces are provided mechanically or
chemically etch protective galvanized metal before priming and painting.
D.
Correct defects in drywall taping and finish prior to application of surface primer and paint.
E.
Concrete and masonry surfaces are to be fully cured and free of moisture. Surfaces shall be
cleaned of dirt, laitance, encrustations or foreign matter, such as oils or other agents that are not
compatible with the paint.
3.3
A.
PREPARATION FOR PAINTING
THINNING
Thin only as directed by printed instructions of manufacturer of applicable
paint.
PAINTING
09900-3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.4
BFL OWEN
PAINT APPLICATION
A.
Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats.
B.
Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to the unaided eye from a distance of five
feet.
C.
Completed finish to be free from alkali burns and dull spots and shall be uniform in color and sheen.
D.
Insure acceptable paint finishes of even, without runs, sagging, brush marks, skips, uniform
color, complete opacity, free from cloudy or mottled appearance in surfaces undercoats not
showing through and evident thickness of coatings.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING
09900-4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 10425
SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of signs:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.3
Panel signs.
Dimensional letters and numbers.
Cast metal plaques.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities" for temporary project identification
signs.
Division 2 Section "Site Improvements" for roadway signs and traffic signals.
Division 10 Section "Directories and Bulletin Boards" for building directories.
Division 10 Section "Exterior Post and Panel Signs" for freestanding exterior
signs.
Division 14 Section "Electric Traction Elevators" for elevator door jamb
markings.
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates
for mechanical equipment.
Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates
for electrical equipment.
Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated exit signs.
See Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated
letters.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
SIGNS
10425 - 1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
B.
Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
C.
Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and
large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds,
layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of
wording and lettering layout.
For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other
anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections.
Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted
dimensional letters and numbers.
Furnish full-size rubbings for metal plaques.
D.
Wiring diagrams from the manufacturer for illuminated sign units.
E.
Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of
color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with
requirements indicated.
1.
Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture:
a.
b.
2.
Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's color charts
consisting of actual sections of material including the full range of colors
available for each material required.
Aluminum: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6-inch-long
sections of extrusions and not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate,
showing the full range of colors available.
Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance
with requirements indicated:
a.
b.
c.
1.4
BFL OWEN
Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Provide a sample panel not
less than 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches for each material, color, texture, and
pattern required. On each panel include a representative sample of the
graphic image process required, showing graphic style, and colors and
finishes of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices.
Aluminum: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6-inch-long
sections of extrusions and not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate.
Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include
sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
Dimensional Letters: Provide full-size representative samples of each
dimensional letter type required, showing letter style, color, and material
finish and method of attachment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
SIGNS
10425 - 2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.5
BFL OWEN
A.
Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those
indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and
sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the
Work.
B.
UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide lighting fixtures and electrical components for
illuminated signs that are labeled and listed by UL and comply with applicable NEMA
standards.
C.
Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from
one source of a single manufacturer.
D.
Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other
manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not
change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is
on the proposer.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings
and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Manufacturers of Panel Signs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
ABC Architectural Signing System.
Allenite.
Andco Industries Corp.
APCO Graphics, Inc.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Best Manufacturing Company.
Charleston Industries, Inc.
DGS Corp.
Diskey Sign Corp.
Environmental Graphic Systems, Inc.
SIGNS
10425 - 3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
2.
Andco Industries Corp.
A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Gemini, Inc.
Matthews International Corp.
Metal Arts.
Metallic Arts, Inc.
The Southwell Company.
Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
Vomar Products, Inc.
Manufacturers of Cast Plaques:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.2
Modulex.
Mohawk Sign Systems.
Poblocki & Sons, Inc.
Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
The Supersine Company.
Vomar Products, Inc.
Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
3.
BFL OWEN
Andco Industries Corp.
A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Best Manufacturing Company.
Gemini, Inc.
Matthews International Corp.
Metal Arts.
Metallic Arts, Inc.
OMC Industries, Inc.
The Southwell Company.
Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
Vomar Products, Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate
monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural
strength of 16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum
allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F (80 deg C), and of the following
general types:
1.
2.
Transparent Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "clear," provide
colorless sheet in matte finish, with light transmittance of 92 percent, when
tested according to the requirements of ASTM D 1003.
White Translucent Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "white," provide
white translucent sheet of density required to produce uniform brightness and
minimum halation effects.
SIGNS
10425 - 4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.
4.
BFL OWEN
Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "opaque," provide colored
opaque acrylic sheet in colors and finishes indicated.
Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "opaque," provide colored
opaque acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the manufacturer's
standards.
B.
Plastic Laminate: Provide high-pressure plastic laminate engraving stock with face and
core plies in contrasting colors, in finishes and color combinations indicated or, if not
indicated, as selected from the manufacturer's standards.
C.
Aluminum Sheet: Provide aluminum sheet of alloy and temper recommended by the sign
manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength
and durability properties specified in ASTM B 209 for 5005-H15.
D.
Aluminum Extrusions: Provide aluminum extrusions of alloy and temper recommended
by the sign manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than
the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5.
E.
Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by
the sign manufacturer for the casting process used and for the use and finish indicated.
F.
Bronze Plate: Provide bronze plate, copper alloy UNS C28000, Muntz metal, 60 percent
copper.
G.
Bronze Castings: Provide bronze castings, copper alloy UNS C83600, complying with
the requirements of ASTM B 584.
H.
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip: Provide stainless steel plate, sheet, or strip, AISI
Type 302, complying with requirements of ASTM A 167.
I.
Vinyl Film: Provide opaque nonreflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch minimum thickness,
with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior as well as interior
applications.
J.
ABS Plastic:
Provide high-impact thermoplastic composed of copolymers of
acrylonitrile, butadiene, and styrene.
K.
Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the
sign material and mounting surface.
L.
Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts
for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed
steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as
required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
M.
Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use colored coatings, including inks and
paints for copy and background colors, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers
for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for the application intended.
SIGNS
10425 - 5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.3
BFL OWEN
PANEL SIGNS
A.
Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes,
colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
1.
B.
Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished
to conform with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under
installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured
diagonally.
Edge Condition: Square cut.
Edge Condition: Beveled.
Edge Condition: Bull nose.
Edge Color for Plastic Laminate: Edge color same as copy.
Edge Color for Plastic Laminate: Edge color same as background.
Corner Condition: Square corners.
Corner Condition: Corners rounded to radius indicated.
Framed Panel Signs: Fabricate frames to profile indicated; comply with the following
requirements for materials and corner conditions:
1.
2.
3.
Material: Aluminum, extruded or cast.
Material: Acrylic plastic.
Material: Injection molded ABS plastic.
a.
4.
5.
The manufacturer has the option of using any material listed above.
Corner Condition: Square corners.
Corner Condition: Corners rounded to radius indicated.
D.
Laminated Sign Panels: Permanently laminate face panels to backing sheets of material
and thickness indicated using the manufacturer's standard process.
E.
Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded
aluminum to suit sign panel construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factorypaint brackets in a color matching the background color of the sign panel.
F.
Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements
indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of
letters, numbers, and other graphic devices.
G.
Engraved Copy: Machine-engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices
into sign panel on the face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to
uniform depth. Use high-speed cutters mechanically linked to master templates in a
pantographic system or equivalent process capable of producing characters of the style
indicated with sharply formed edges.
SIGNS
10425 - 6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through the exposed face ply of the plastic
laminate sheet to expose the contrasting core ply.
Engraved Metal: Fill engraved copy with enamel.
Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel.
Face-Engraved Clear Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel. Apply
opaque background color coating to the back face of acrylic sheet.
a.
5.
H.
2.
Subsurface-Engraved Acrylic Sheet: Reverse-engrave the back face of clear
acrylic sheet. Fill resulting copy with enamel. Apply opaque background color
coating over enamel-filled copy.
Use reverse silk-screen process to print copy; overspray the copy with an opaque
background color coating.
Use Dupont Chromalin heat- and pressure-laminated photopolymer film system
to form copy and background color.
a.
b.
The manufacturer has the option of selecting either process indicated
above.
The manufacturer has the option of selecting either process indicated
above, or using subsurface engraving process, as appropriate to the copy
form and the economics of production.
Raised Copy: Machine-cut copy characters from matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet and
chemically weld onto the acrylic sheet forming sign panel face. Produce precisely
formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
J.
Engrave the copy to produce a minimum indentation depth of 1/32 inch
and a minimum stroke width of 1/4 inch.
Subsurface Copy: Apply copy to the back face of clear acrylic sheet forming the panel
face by process indicated to produce precisely formed opaque images free from rough
edges.
1.
I.
BFL OWEN
Panel Material: Matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet.
Panel Material: Matte-finished clear acrylic with opaque color coating
subsurface applied.
Raised Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.
Raised Copy Thickness: 1/16 inch.
Raised Copy Thickness: 1/8 inch.
Raised Copy Thickness: 3/16 inch.
Raised Copy Thickness: 1/4 inch.
Applied Copy: Die-cut characters from vinyl film with pressure-sensitive adhesive
backing. Apply copy to the exposed face of the sign panel.
1.
2.
Panel Material: Matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet.
Panel Material: Matte-finished clear acrylic sheet with opaque color coating
subsurface applied.
SIGNS
10425 - 7
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.4
BFL OWEN
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS
A.
Cast Letters and Numbers: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce
characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles,
free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Cast lugs into the back of characters
and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for
finish, style, and size.
1.
2.
B.
Cutout Letters and Numbers: Cut letters and numbers from solid plate material of
thickness indicated. Produce precisely cut characters with square cut, smooth edges.
Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Metal: Aluminum.
Metal: Bronze.
Metal:
Metal:
Metal:
Metal:
Metal:
Aluminum.
Bronze.
Stainless steel.
Brass.
Chrome plated.
Fabricated Letters and Numbers: Fabricate letters and numbers to required sizes and
styles, using metals and thicknesses indicated. Form exposed faces and sides of
characters to produce surfaces free from warp and distortion. Include internal bracing
for stability and attachment of mounting accessories. Comply with requirements
indicated for finish, style, and size.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Aluminum Sheet: Not less than 0.090 inch thick. Fabricate by the heliarc
welding process.
Bronze Plate: Not less than 20 gage.
Stainless Steel Sheet: Not less than 18 gage for face and 22 gage for returns.
Letter Height: 2 inches.
Letter Height: 4 inches.
Letter Height: 6 inches.
Letter Height: 8 inches.
Letter Height: 10 inches.
Letter Height: 12 inches.
Letter Height: 18 inches.
Letter Style: Helvetica.
Letter Style: Gothic.
Letter Style: Roman.
Letter Style: Futura.
Illuminated Units: Illuminate dimensional letters and numbers in the manner
indicated using manufacturer's standard lighting components including neon
tubes, transformers, insulators, and other components. Make provisions for
servicing and concealed connection to the building system. Coordinate electrical
characteristics with those of the power supply provided.
a.
Backlighted Units: Provide concealed white neon tubes of the number
indicated or required by size of the characters. Include manufacturer's
SIGNS
10425 - 8
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
b.
2.5
hardware for projection mounting of the characters at the distance from
the wall surface indicated.
Facelighted Units: Fabricate letter faces from translucent plastic sheet
of thickness indicated. Attach letters to sheet metal back channels.
Provide neon tubes of the number and spacing required to illuminate
letter faces evenly.
CAST METAL PLAQUES
A.
Plaques: Castings shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Comply
with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and
with requirements shown for thickness, size, shape, and copy. Hand-tool and buff
borders and raised copy to produce the manufacturer's standard satin polished finish.
Refer to the "Finishes" Article for other finish requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
2.6
BFL OWEN
Metal: Aluminum.
Metal: Bronze.
Border Style: None (straight), polished edge.
Border Style: Plain bevel.
Border Style: Projected bevel.
Border Style: Raised flat band.
Border Style: Double raised line border.
Border Style: As indicated.
Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard pebble texture.
Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard leatherette finish.
Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard matte finish.
Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard stipple finish.
Background Finish: Provide the manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish.
Background Finish: Provide dark statuary finish to comply with the requirement
specified for bronze finishes, except provide background texture specified above
in lieu of mechanical finish indicated.
FINISHES
A.
Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of
materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related
to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the
Architect from the manufacturer's standards.
B.
Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations
and applications recommendations.
C.
Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system
established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
1.
Class II Clear Anodized Fine Satin Finish: AA-M31C21A31 (Mechanical
Finish: Fine satin directional textured; Chemical Finish: Fine matte etched
finish; Anodic Coating: Class II Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.4 mil).
SIGNS
10425 - 9
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.
3.
Class II Clear Anodized Medium Satin Finish: AA-M31C22A31 (Mechanical
Finish: Fine satin directional textured; Chemical Finish: Medium matte etched
finish; Anodic Coating: Class II Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.4 mil).
Baked-Enamel
Finish:
AA-M4xC12C42R1x (Mechanical Finish:
Manufacturer's standard, other nondirectional textured; Chemical Finish:
Chemical conversion coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment;
Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel in compliance with
paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and
painting.
a.
Organic Coating:
Thermosetting-modified acrylic enamel
primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8 except with a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss.
1)
2)
3)
D.
Color: As indicated by reference to the manufacturer's standard
color designations.
Color: Match the Architect's sample.
Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's
standard colors.
Bronze Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "CDA" conform to the system
established by the Copper Development Association for designating finishes.
1.
2.
Natural Satin Finish: CDA-M31O6x (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin directional
textured; Clear Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard air-dry clear organic
coating as specified below).
Statuary Finish: CDA-M31C55O6x (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin directional
textured; Chemical Finish: Sulfide conversion coating; Clear Organic Coating:
Manufacturer's standard air-dry clear organic coating as specified below).
a.
b.
c.
E.
BFL OWEN
Clear Organic Coating: Air-dried acrylic coating Incralac as developed
by International Copper Research Corporation, 1.0-mil minimum dry
thickness.
Clear Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard clear coating.
Color: Uniform, matching color of the Architect's sample.
Stainless Steel Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "AISI" conform to the system
established by the American Iron and Steel Institute for designating finishes.
1.
Bright, Directional Polish Finish: AISI No. 4 finish.
a.
b.
Grain Direction: Horizontal.
Grain Direction: Vertical.
SIGNS
10425 - 10
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of
the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.
B.
Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free
from distortion or other defects in appearance.
Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods
indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth,
nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.
Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the
sign manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered
surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended by the sign
manufacturer to hold the sign in place until the adhesive has fully cured.
Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch-thick concealed aluminum shim plates
with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other
mounting methods are not practicable. Attach the plate with fasteners and
anchors suitable for secure attachment to the substrate. Attach panel sign units
to the plate using the method specified above.
C.
Bracket-Mounted Units: Provide the manufacturer's standard brackets, fittings, and
hardware as appropriate for mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and
ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls or ceilings with concealed
fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer's directions.
D.
Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening
methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall
construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to
establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.
1.
2.
E.
Flush Mounting: Mount letters with backs in contact with the wall surface.
Projected Mounting: Mount letters at the projection distance from the wall
surface indicated.
Cast Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using the standard method recommended by the
manufacturer for the type of wall surface indicated.
1.
2.
Concealed Mounting: Mount the plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped
lugs on the back of the plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting
cement.
Face Mounting: Mount plaques using exposed fasteners with rosettes attached
through the face of the plaque into the wall surface.
SIGNS
10425 - 11
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.2
BFL OWEN
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 10425
SIGNS
10425 - 12
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section
B. Section Includes:
1.
This section provides the basic mechanical requirements that apply to Division 15:
Mechanical.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 16: Electrical.
D. Coordination:
1. Coordinate related Work of Division 15: Mechanical.
2. Coordinate related Work of other divisions.
3. Coordinate scheduling to minimize operational disruption of existing facilities.
E. Ordinances and Regulatory Requirements:
1.
Current federal Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) regulations require the
furnishing of lead-free pipe, solder, and flux in the installation or repair of
plumbing in non-residential facilities connected to public drinking water
systems. Under this regulation, solders and flux are considered lead-free when
they contain 0.2 percent lead or less. Pipes and pipe fittings are considered leadfree when they contain 8.0 percent lead or less.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Provide lead-free water pipe, solder, and flux materials that meet the
standards as outlined by the federal SDWA regulations.
Collect pipe, solder, and flux material samples as required by the IOR.
Test samples shall be delivered to an Owner designated testing laboratory
for testing of lead content.
1.
Test samples for lead content by the atomic absorption
spectrophotometry method.
Materials found not conforming to SDWA regulations shall be deemed
defective Work and shall be replaced with lead-free materials.
Comprehensive testing of the remaining materials for their lead content
shall be performed as required by the IOR.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
15050 -1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.
BFL OWEN
Workmanship, materials, equipment, and installation shall comply with industry
standards and code requirements. Where manufacturer’s recommendations
exceed industry standards, the manufacturer’s recommendation shall establish
the minimum standard. As a minimum, standards from the following
organizations shall apply:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
m.
3.
AGA - American Gas Association.
AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
Boiler and Pressure Codes.
2. Code for Pressure Piping.
ARI - Air Conditioning Refrigeration Institute.
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers.
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
1.
A-53 Specification for Welded and Seamless Pipe.
AWA - American Waterworks Association.
FM - Factory Mutual.
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
1.
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Association, Inc.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
Workmanship, materials, equipment, and installation shall comply with federal,
state, and local codes including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
UBC, UMC, and UPC - latest edition as adopted by the City of Los
Angeles, the County of Los Angeles, and the State of California including
amendments effective on the Effective Date of the Contract.
b. Title 8, California Administrative Code.
c. California Building Code (CBC).
d.
Division of Industrial Safety - boiler and fire-pressured vessel safety
orders.
e. Division of Industrial Safety - electrical safety orders.
f.
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
g. Department of Health.
h. South Coast Air Quality Management District.
F. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including the "General Conditions" and "General
Requirements" and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods:
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
15050 -2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
1.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2.
Mechanical demolition and reinstallation.
3.
Fire Sprinkler system demolition and reinstallation.
4.
Plumbing system demolition and reinstallation.
9.
Cutting and patching.
10.
Touchup painting and finishing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
Division 1 Sections "General Conditions" and "General Requirements" for
procedures for coordinating cutting and patching with other construction
activities.
2.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedures for cutting and
patching.
3.
Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected protions of
the building for alterations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
1.4
B.
Product data for all new material to be installed.
C.
Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for any modification to the fire
sprinkler system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
2.
Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping."
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved
and that certification is current.
C.
ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
D. Modification to existing fire sprinkler system shall comply with NFPA 13, and local fire
authority requirements.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
15050 -3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.5
BFL OWEN
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
B.
Coordinate mechanical equipment, piping, and ductwork installation with
other building components.
Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for mechanical installations.
C.
Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-inplace concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
D.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment
for efficient flow of the Work.
E.
Coordinate connection of electrical services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Match existing materials.
B. Materials used in the modification to existing fire sprinkler system shall comply with NFPA 13,
and local fire authority requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS--COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Install piping to match existing sizes, material and slope, and as required to
extend around any new structural modifications.
B. Install piping free of sags and bends.
C.
Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.
Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated or where original installation was
diagonal.
D.
Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements.
Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel
removal.
E.
Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch (25-mm) clearance
around insulation. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit
valve servicing.
F.
Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and walls.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
15050 -4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
G.
Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes.
H.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE plastic (removable) sleeves.
I.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor and
roof slabs, and where indicated.
J.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment
areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure
clamping ring where specified.
Comply with Section 15300 and apply the most stringent requirements.
Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.
Install large enough sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a.
PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches (150 mm).
b.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches (150 mm).
c.
Steel Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6 inches (150 mm) and larger that
penetrate gypsum board partitions.
d.
Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron
soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches(50 mm) above fmished floor level.
i.
K.
Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout.
Above Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals.
1.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm).
2.
Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger.
3.
Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed
instructions.
M.
Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
15050 -5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
3.2 PAINTING AND FINISHING
3.3
A.
Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting requirements.
B.
Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
DEMOLITION
A.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove work as required for structural modifications. Replace
all piping and equiprment to operational condition.
B.
Where pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed,
remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.
C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.
D.
Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried pipe abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm)
beyond the face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.
E.
Removal: Remove indicated equipment from the Project site.
F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational
equipment indicated for relocation.
G. Downtime of fire protection system shall be kept to a minimum. All outages shall be coordinated
with JWA representatives. Provide temporary fire protection extinguishers as required by governing
agency in occupied areas and construction areas.
3.4
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces
necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the
trades involved.
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
15050 -6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section
B.
Section Includes: Furnish and install fire sprinkler system for protection of designated areas of
building including attic and between floor spaces unless otherwise indicated. Sprinkler head, for
alarm purposes, shall be provided in the attic, one for every 1,500 square feet, when space is not
otherwise protected by regular sprinkler coverage. Items required for this Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Automatic wet pipe fire sprinkler system.
2. Preparation of complete Shop Drawings.
3. Required permits, licenses and inspections.
4. Cleaning, testing and adjusting.
5. Project record documents.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division - 2.
2. Section 09900: Paints and Coatings.
3. Section 15050: Basic Mechanical Requirements.
4. Section 15050: Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
5. Section 15075: Mechanical Identification.
6. Section 15400: Plumbing.
7.
Section 16050: Basic Electrical Requirements.
8.
Division 16: Fire Alarm System
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
1.02
BFL OWEN
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 01.
B. Manufacturer’s Data:
1.
Submit a material list of items to be furnished and installed under this section.
2. Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data required to
demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements.
C. Deferred Approval Drawings:
1.
Provide Deferred Approval Drawings and calculations of complete automatic
fire sprinkler system, including supports, seismic restraint details, equipment and
material specifications, and schedules. A minimum of 5 sets of Drawings and
calculations shall be submitted to the Architect for review. Following review by
the Architect, the Drawings and calculations shall be submitted to EOR.
Following EOR review and approval, the Architect shall return 3 sets of the
approved Drawings and calculations.
2. Hydraulically designed systems may be furnished when designed in
accordance with the provisions of UBC STD 9.1 and 9.2. Calculations shall be
based on a format acceptable to EOR and Owner. Calculations shall be
performed utilizing no more than 90 percent of the minimum available water
supply.
3. For hydraulically designed systems, Reviewer shall be given a copy of
calculations with system Drawings, each signed by a State of California
registered engineer. Submit 2 sets of calculations with 2 prints of the Drawings
to the Architect. Following approval, corrected copies of calculations and
Drawings shall be furnished to the Architect. Transmittal procedure shall then be
as noted above.
4. Approval by the fire authorities may include minimum legal
requirements and does not supersede more extensive requirements of the
Contract Documents.
5. Deferred Approval Drawings shall be same size as the Contract
Drawings. Space shall be left in lower right hand corner for insertion of Project
title block by the Architect.
6. Deferred Approval Drawings shall be prepared and be signed by a
licensed fire protection engineer in the State of California.
7. Installation of fire sprinkler system shall not start until approved
Deferred Approval Drawings have been returned. Alignment of fire sprinklers
and relationship to ceiling tile locations shall conform to reviewed Deferred
Approval Drawings.
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
D. Record Drawings: Record drawings of installed Work shall be maintained current on
the Project site, available for Fire Inspector and the IOR to review. At completion of
installation, Project record drawings shall be signed by installer and delivered to the
Architect. Hydraulically designed system Drawings shall bear legible 1/4 inch minimum
height notations: "HYDRAULICALLY DESIGNED SYSTEM" and "DESIGN
PRESSURE: PSIG".
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with applicable national or local codes and standards: ASTM,
ASME, ANSI, IAPMO, Federal Specifications, MSS Specifications, AWWA, CISPI,
NFPA, FM, UL, UPC, UMC.
B. Unless otherwise noted, provisions of NFPA 13, Standard for Installation of
Sprinkler Systems, are made part of this section.
C. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in Work of this section shall be
produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a
5 year history of successful production that is acceptable to the Architect.
1.04
1.05
FIRE SERVICE WATER CONNECTION
A.
The Owner shall pay fees and provide for the installation of a detector check valve, with
street connection by the local water purveyor.
B.
If the water purveyor requires a backflow assembly, furnish an approved double check
valve assembly and piping on “house side” of fire main.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Comply with the provisions specified in Divisions 01 and 15.
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate activities in accordance with provisions of Divisions 01 and 15.
1.07
JOB CONDITIONS
A. Unscheduled utility flow interruptions are not permitted. Schedule such interruptions
in advance, with the OAR.
1.08
EXTRA MATERIALS FOR MAINTENANCE
A. Provide spare sprinkler heads in quantity equal to a minimum of one percent of total
number of each type of head installed, to a minimum of 3 heads of each type and
temperature rating. Furnish one special installation wrench in each box of heads.
Locations of each box of spare heads shall be as designated by the IOR. There shall be a
minimum of one box of spare sprinklers and one wrench per building and a minimum of
six spare sprinklers for every three hundred sprinklers per building. Provide signs as
required by NFPA 13, 2-2.7.
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide systems complete including, but not limited to:
1. Underground and above ground piping, including valves and fittings,
trenching, backfilling, alarms, and controls.
2. Overhead sprinkler system for those areas where required.
3. All projections shall be sprinkler protected.
B. Sprinkler Heads:
1. Provide pendant spray type sprinkler heads with escutcheons in areas
with finished ceilings.
2. Provide upright in areas with exposed piping.
3. Sprinkler heads in boiler rooms, furnace rooms, or heater rooms shall be
furnished with blue arms or blue frangible glass bulbs rated at 286 degrees F.
Sprinkler heads in attics that will experience over 100 degrees ambient
temperature shall be furnished as 210 to 212 degree rated heads. If a sprinkler is
directly affected by a spotlight, steam, or other heat source, then a 360 degrees F
sprinkler head will be furnished. Sprinkler heads in all other locations, unless
otherwise noted, shall be 165 degrees F rated.
C. Fire Sprinklers:
1. Provide an underground UL listed PVC or Ductile iron supply line
connected to detector check or water main as indicated. Install site water mains a
minimum distance of 10’-0” from building and/or structure foundations. Water
meter P.O.C. will be ordered and paid for by the Owner. Underground water
lines shall be installed 36 inches below grade, minimum. Tracer wire shall be
installed in accordance with Section 15075: Mechanical Identification.
2. Provide fire department connections, check valves, shut-off valves, test
and drain assemblies, and an approved flow indicator assembly at the locations
indicated, as required by code or UBC STD 9.1 and 9.2. Flow indicator shall
activate fire alarm system in case of water flow in sprinkler system; and activate
local alarm on the outside of the building. Connection of this switch is a part of
the Work of Division 16. If shut-off valve is unprotected, it shall be furnished
with a supervisory switch.
3. Sprinkler lines within the building shall be concealed within the
structure. Risers shall be installed in janitors, heater, supply rooms or similar
service rooms whenever possible, and shall not obstruct access, function or
maintenance of other equipment within the space. Mains and risers shall be
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
furnished with fire sprinkler protection unless otherwise approved by fire
authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Pipe through ceilings at head locations shall be furnished with split two
piece escutcheons. Unless otherwise designated, escutcheons shall be identical.
5. Sprinkler heads in boiler rooms, furnace rooms, or heater rooms shall be
286 degree heads and ordinary hazard design. Sprinklers in attics that will
exceed 100 degrees F. ambient temperature shall be 210/212 degree rated.
Sprinkler heads in all other locations, unless otherwise noted, shall be 165
degrees heads. If exposed sprinklers are to be installed public areas with ceiling
heights of less than 9’-0” then they shall be furnished as fusible link type rather
than glass bulb type.
6. Furnish signs, extra heads, special wrenches, and cabinet for spare heads
as recommended and required by UBC STD 9.1 and 9.2.
7. Sprinkler system shall be provided with complete drainage facilities in
accordance with UBC STD 9.1 and 9.2. If practical, drain shall be piped to storm
drain system or to street gutter. Inspector’s test shall be piped away from
planters to asphalt area. Furnish protection of piping against damage due to
earthquakes in accordance with applicable requirements UBC STD 9.1 and 9.2.
8. Upon completion of the Work of this section, and before Substantial
Completion, subject system, including underground supply connection, to tests
required by UBC STD 9.1 and 9.2. Minimum hydrostatic test shall be two
hundred pounds for two hours with no leakage. The Owner shall be furnished
with a certificate as required.
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Access Panel:
FAP-1
Square, steel, prime-coated, with vandal-proof door lock
operated by allen wrench.
Smith
Josam
Elmdor
4760
DW – AKL
B. Globe or Angle Valves: UL listed.
AV-1
Bronze angle valve: 2 inches and smaller, screwed-in bonnet,
threaded ends, rising stem:
Nibco
T-301
Kennedy
98 SD
Fairbanks Potter-Roemer
0210
4070
C. Automatic Fire Sprinkler Head, UL listed:
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
AFSH-1
ceilings.
Star
Model E
Grinnell
F950
Viking
Model C
Star
Model E
AFSH-3
Central
Model A
Brass upright type for areas with no ceilings.
Viking
Reliable
Model A-4 Model G
Central
Model A
Brass flush with ceiling type.
Star
Model E
AFSH-4
Grinnell
F950
Brass pendant type for areas with suspended
Reliable
Model G
AFSH-2
BFL OWEN
Grinnell
F995
Viking
Model C
Reliable
Model G
Central
BV4
Chrome on/off pendant head (UL listed).
Gem
F927
AFSH-5
Fully concealed type sprinkler for installation in boys and girls toilet rooms, low ceiling corridors,
stairways, arcades, and rooms where supervision is non-existent or minimal.
Reliable G-4 with chrome cover.
GEM F-690 head with F-692 chrome cover.
D. Backflow Prevention Assemblies:
BPV-1
approved.
Pressure differential type, Los Angeles City
Ames
Febco
Watts
Wilkins
4000SS DA 826 DA 909 RPDA 975 DA
BPV-2
Double Detector Check Assembly - For Department of Water
and Power water protection.
Wilkins
Watts
Febco
Ames
950 DA 709DCDA 805 DA 3000SS DA
350 DA
876 DA
856 DA
BPV-3
Double Check Valve Assembly, for installation with non-toxic
systems, steam make-up, etc.
Febco Wilkins
Watts
Ames
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
850
950
709
007
BFL OWEN
2000
E. Butterfly Valves:
EFV-1
Grooved end, 175 psi, for fire protection sprinkler risers. UL listed,
FM approved, with double pole/double throw monitor switch, double
seal design for bubble tight shut off at 175 psi. Corrosion-resistant,
fusion-bonded nylon II body coating. Flag type, easy to read position
indicator. Figure 82M Kennedy valve, or equal.
F. Check Valves:
CV-1
Bronze check valves: 2 inches and smaller, 200 psi WOG,
bronze disc, swing type, conforming to MSS-SP-80, threaded ends.
Stockham
B-319
Crane
American
37
31F
CV-2
Iron check valves: 2-1/2 inches and larger, class 175,
composition disc, swing type, bolted cap, UL listed, flanged ends:
Stockham Kennedy
G-940
126A
CV-3
Grinnel
F-514
American
33R
Grooved Check valve 2 ½” and larger:
United #67 Gruvlock #7800
Reliable Mode “G”
G. Escutcheons:
ES-1
Aluminum, chrome 2-piece canopy, 3 inches in
extended position.
Sweet-Donaldson
No. 401
F422
Grinnell
H. Fire Department Connections:
FDC-1
Figure 5710
Fire-West
No. 229
I.
UL approved, flush type, 2-1/2 inches x 2-1/2 inches x 4 inches
bronze body hose connection.
Potter-Roemer
No. 5229 21-201
Standard
Powhaten
Crocker
Flow Indicators:
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-7
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
FIA-1
Notifier
BFL OWEN
Listed by State Fire Marshal, with double pole, double-throw switch,
one normally open and one normally closed.
Star Autocall Potter-Roemer
Central
WFD
VRS WF-4
6200 series
model PNI
VSR-SF
VSR-F
J. Outside Screw and Yoke:
OS&Y-1 Bronze Gate Valves: 2 inches and smaller, class 175, solid
bronze wedge disc, OS & Y, copper silicon alloy stem, listed by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. (UL) Threaded ends:
Stockham
B-133
Crane
Grinnell
459
Fig. 66
OS&Y-2 Iron gate valves: 2-1/2 inches and larger, class 175, IBBM,
OS&Y, solid wedge disc, Teflon-impregnated packing, UL listed, flanged ends.
Stockham
G-634
Crane
Kennedy
467
68
37
OS+4-3
Resilient Wedge Mueller
Epoxy-coated
2360
OS&Y-3
American
RTC
Clow F-6136
2 ½” and larger, epoxy coated, resilient wedge, 175lb gate valve (for
riser valves, P.I.V., and shut off for D.D.C.A.)
Clow #F-6136, Nibco or Kennedy.
K. Gate Valves:
GV-1
Bronze gate valves: 2 inches and smaller, class 175, solid bronze wedge
disc, rising stem copper silicon alloy stem, UL listed, threaded ends.
Stockham Crane
Grinnell
B-133
459
Fig. 66
GV-2
Iron gate valves: 2-1/2 inches and larger, class 175, IBBM, solid
wedge disc, Teflon impregnated packing, UL listed, flanged ends:
Stockham Crane
Kennedy
G-634
467
68
37
American Mueller
2360
L. Post Indicator Valves:
PIV-1
Vertical indicator posts: Furnished for underground valves, post
must provide a means of knowing if the valve is open or shut, UL listed.
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-8
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
Stockham Kennedy Grinnell
Clow
G-951
541
F-750
F-5760
Iron gate valves: 4 inches and larger, class 175, IBBM, non-rising
stem, mounting plate for indicator post, UL listed, flanged ends.
Stockham Kennedy
G-635
71X
American
27MP
M. Sprinkler Guard:
SPG-1
Star
2-piece welded steel wire; furnished for upright, pendant and
sidewall sprinkler heads.
Reliable
Viking
Grinnell
Central
N. Sprinkler Horn:
SPH-1
UL approved, surface-mounted, weatherproof and red finished.
Star
Notifier
O. Fire Sprinkler Pipes:
FSP-1
Sprinkler pipe shall meet ASTM A795 or A135, and shall be UL
listed and FM approved. Pipes shall provide a corrosion resistance ratio (CRR)
of 1.00 or greater per UL listing. Piping shall be black carbon steel, except in
FM approved dry systems, where pipe shall be hot-dipped galvanized to meet
ASTM A 795 zinc coating specifications (for pipes above ground within
building or structure).
Pipe shall be Schedule 40 or Dyna-Thread 40, or equal; for 2
inches and smaller. Threaded joints and fittings.
Schedule 40 for pipes size 2 1/2 inches or larger. Victaulic or
grooved fittings may be furnished.
Submit mill certificates from manufacturer stating that piping
material furnished meets above criteria; (i.e.: threadable pipe has a UL assigned
CRR of 1.00 minimum, that it meets ASTM A 135 or A 795, and it is UL listed
and FM approved.)
FSP-2
Cast iron, class 200 (for pipes below grade). Gasketed joints,
ASA Spec. B16.4.
FSP-3
Plastic, PVC, thickwall (cast iron OD sized). UL listed for fire main
service (underground). Gasketed joints - Johns Manville Blue Brute
class 200, or equal.
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-9
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.03
BFL OWEN
ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANCES
A.
Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated for exposed piping at every penetration inside
finished rooms.
B. Guards: Provide guards as required by the Architect.
C. Miscellaneous:
complete systems.
Provide all other accessories and appurtenances required to
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this section shall be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign matter, from inside and outside of pipes, before assembly.
C. Provide piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install underground supply line connected to detector check or water main indicated.
Braced or clamped bends shall be in accordance with requirements of National Fire
Protection Association Pamphlet 24. Provide vertical clamp rods at flange and spigot
piece of risers, long enough to pass through riser's base flange. Furnish concrete thrust
blocks where required. Tracer wire shall be installed as per Section 15075: Mechanical
Identification on all PVC underground piping.
B. Install Fire Department connections, check valves, shut-off valves, test and drain
assemblies and flow indicator as per Deferred Approval Drawings. F.D.C. must be
installed to be accessible by the Fire Department.
C. Pipe through floors, wall, and ceilings, at head locations, shall be furnished with
required sleeves and escutcheons. Escutcheons shall be polished chrome plated.
D. Sprinkler system shall be provided with complete drainage facilities in accordance
with UBC standards. Drain discharge shall discharge into a sewer, storm drain, or street
gutter.
E. Upon completion of the Work of this section, and before Substantial Completion,
subject system, including underground supply connections, to tests required by UBC
standards and furnish the Owner with a certificate of compliance as required.
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-10
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
F. Close nipples are not permitted. Threaded unions shall not be installed in concealed
areas unless provided with an access panel.
G. Fire sprinkler systems piping hanger and supports shall conform to the UBC STD
requirements.
H.
Underground piping shall be provided with a minimum of thirty-six inches of cover to
grade. Underground pipe shall be installed on a flat undisturbed sand bed. After required
pressure-leak test, pipe shall be covered with sand not less than 6 inches thick, before
backfilling.
I.
Provide backflow prevention devices as indicated. Installations of backflow prevention
devices shall be tested and certified by a certified Los Angeles County backflow
prevention device tester prior to Substantial Completion. Tests shall be performed in the
presence of the IOR. Test reports shall be turned over to the IOR for mailing to proper
agency.
J.
Provide shunt trip when sprinklers are installed in the elevator machine rooms and
elevator hoist way unless the sprinklers are located 2 feet or less from the pit floor.
K.
Inspectors test valve shall be located at the opposite end of the sprinkler system from the
supply. I.T.V. discharge lines shall be installed to a hopper room sink or to the outside of
the building to within a foot from the ground where it will drain away from the building.
L.
Each building with a sprinkler riser shall be furnished with an accessible shut off valve
no higher than five feet from the finish floor.
3.04
PROTECTION
A.
3.05
Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.06
The Contractor/Installer for fire sprinklers shall be pre-qualified based on the
requirements of the local Fire Department and provide evidence of proper certificates.
CLEANUP
A.
Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-11
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
PART1-GENERAL
1.0
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Provisions of Division 01 shall apply to this Section.
B.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedures for cutting and patching.
B.
Section 02070: Selective Demolition.
C.
Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the "General Conditions" and "General
Requirements" and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
D.
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following electrical materials and methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
A.
Building wire, connectors, and splices for branch circuits and feeders where
temporary disconnection is required for structural modifications.
Supporting devices for electrical components that are to be
reinstalled.
Electrical demolition.
Cutting
and
patching
for
electrical construction.
Touchup painting.
Installation of new conduit expansion fittings where existing conduits cross
structural expansion joints. Size and movement of expansion fitting to coordinate
with structural expansion joint.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B.
1.3
Product Data for each type of new product to be installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical work shall be done by an Electrical Contractor holding a C-10 and other
acceptable licenses to the Owner and in conformance with the required permits.
B.
New Electrical work shall meet requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction and the
current California Building Code. Material and labor shall conform to Regulations of the
National Board of Fire Underwriters for Electrical Wiring and Apparatus. All material
shall be new and shall be "UL" listed.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
16050-1
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
B.
Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
C.
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1.
2.
1.4
G.
BFL OWEN
The Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other building components.
B.
Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for electrical installations.
C.
Coordinate installing required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
D.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work.
E.
Coordinate connecting electrical service to components furnished under other Sections.
F.
Coordinate connecting electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead
utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised
service companies, and controlling agencies.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where electrical items requiring access are
concealed by finished surfaces.
H.
Coordinate installing electrical identification after completion of finishing where
identification is applied to field-finished surfaces.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.0
2.1
BUILDING WIRE
A.
Description: Single conductor, copper. Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller;
stranded conductor for larger than No. 10 AWG.
B.
Thermoplastic Insulated Wire: Conform to NEMA WC 5.
C.
Cross-Linked, Polyethylene Insulated Wire: Conform to NEMA WC 7.
D.
Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable
for service indicated. Select to comply with Project's installation requirements.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
16050-2
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
A.
BFL OWEN
Channel and angle support systems, hangers, anchors, sleeves, brackets, fabricated items, and
fasteners are designed to provide secure support from the building structure for electrical
components.
1.
2.
B.
Steel channel supports have 9/16-inch (14-mm) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches
(203 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface.
1.
C.
Fittings and accessories mate and match with channels and are from the
same manufacturer.
Nonmetallic Channel and Angle Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, fiberglassresin channels and angles with 9/16-inch (14-mm) diameter holes at a maximum of 8
inches (203 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface.
1.
2.
G.
Material: Steel, except as otherwise indicated, protected from corrosion with
zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved
alternative finish or inherent material characteristics.
Metal Items for Use in Parking Structure: Hot-dip galvanized steel, except as
otherwise indicated.
Fittings and accessories mate and match with channels or angles and are from
the same manufacturer.
Fitting and Accessory Material: Same as channels and angles, except metal items
may be stainless steel.
D.
Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps,
threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel
clamps or "click"- type hangers.
E.
Sheet-Metal Sleeves: 0.0276-inch (0.7-mm) or heavier galvanized sheet steel, round tube,
closed with welded longitudinal joint.
F.
Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and
insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and
size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable
iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
2.2
H.
Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
I.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
J.
Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A.
2.3
Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for a specified
application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application
category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications.
TOUCHUP PAINT
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
16050-3
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
C.
BFL OWEN
A.
For Equipment: Provided by equipment manufacturer and selected to match equipment
finish.
B.
For Nonequipment Surfaces: Matching type and color of undamaged, existing adjacent
finish.
For Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.0
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where
mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated.
B.
Install items level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components, except where otherwise indicated.
C.
Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations.
D. Give right of way to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. BASIC
3.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Considerations for Conduit Routing:
1.
Where conduits are to pass through or will interfere with any Structural member, or
where notching, boring or cutting of the structure is necessary, or where special
openings are required through walls, floors, footings, or other buildings elements,
to accommodate the electrical work, such work shall conform to California
Building Code, Section 1906 for conduits and pipes embedded in concrete and
Section 2326.11.9 and 2326.11.10 for notches and bored holes in structural
elements.
B. Cleaning:
1.
Exposed parts of electrical work shall be left in a neat, clean, usable condition.
Finished painted surfaces shall be unblemished and metal surfaces shall be
polished.
2.
Thoroughly clean all parts of apparatus and equipment. Exposed parts to be
painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster and other materials.
Remove grease and oil spots with solvent. Such surfaces shall be wiped and all
corners and cracks scraped out. Exposed rough metal work shall be smooth, free
of sharp edges, carefully steel brushed to remove rust and other spots, and left in
proper condition to receive finish painting.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
16050-4
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
3.
3.2
BFL OWEN
Contractor shall remove from the Site all debris and rubbish caused by the
electrical work. He shall thoroughly clean building of dirt, debris, rubbish, marks,
etc., caused by performance of work
WIRING METHODS
A.
Feeders: Type THHN/THWN, copper conductor, in raceway, except as otherwise
indicated.
B.
Underground Feeders: Type UF, copper conductor, 90C insulation, in raceway, except as
otherwise indicated.
3.3
C.
Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
D.
Branch Circuits: Type THW, in raceway, except as otherwise indicated.
E.
Class 2 and Class 3 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING METHODS
A.
Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel
system components.
B.
Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C.
Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D.
Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selecting supports.
E.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry all present and future loads, times a safety factor
of at least 4; 200-lb- (90-kg-) minimum design load.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A.
Install wires in raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's
"Standard of Installation."
B.
Conductor Splices: Keep to the minimum and comply with the following:
1.
2.
C.
Install splices and taps that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and
insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
Use splice and tap connectors that are compatible with conductor material.
Wiring at Outlets: Install with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack conductor at each
outlet.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
16050-5
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
D.
Connect outlets and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and
instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and
bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for
equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated,
tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening requirements specified in UL
486A.
E.
Install devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
F.
Raceway Supports: Comply with NFPA 70 and the following requirements:
1.
Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selecting and installing
supports.
2.
Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support
raceways. Provide U bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary
for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type
hangers.
3.
4.
Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable iron pipe hangers or
clamps.
5.
6.
G.
Hanger Rods: 1/4-inch (6-mm) diameter or larger threaded steel, except as
otherwise indicated.
Spring Steel Fasteners: Specifically designed for supporting single conduits or
tubing. May be used in lieu of malleable iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)
and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to channel and slotted angle
supports.
7.
In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the
raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports,
with no weight load on raceway terminals.
Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with conductors.
H.
Miscellaneous Supports: Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards,
disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other
devices except where components are mounted directly to structural features of adequate
strength.
1.
I.
BFL OWEN
Firestopping: Apply to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and
wall assemblies. Perform firestopping as specified in Division 7 Section
"Firestopping" to reestablish the original fire-resistance rating of the assembly at
the penetration.
Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, securely fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware
to the building structure. Perform fastening according to the following:
1.
Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood; toggle bolts on
hollow masonry units; concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid
masonry; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension
clamps on steel.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
16050-6
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
J.
BFL OWEN
Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and
nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts, machine screws, or wood screws.
Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits,
pipe straps, or any other items.
In partitions of light steel construction use sheet-metal screws.
Drill holes in concrete beams so holes more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) deep do
not cut main reinforcing bars.
Drill holes in concrete so holes more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep do not cut main
reinforcing bars.
Fill and seal holes drilled in concrete and not used.
Select fasteners so the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of
the proof-test load.
Install identification devices where required.
1. Install labels at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with
operation and maintenance of equipment.
K.
All new electrical equipment shall be braced or anchored to resist a horizontal force acting
in any direction using the following criteria:
Fixed Equipment on Grade
20% of operating weight
Fixed Equipment on Structure
30% of operating weight
Emergency power and Communication
Equipment on Grade
40% of operating weight
Emergency power and Communication
Equipment on Structure
60% of operating weight
Flexible mounted equipment use 2x the above values.
Simultaneous vertical force use 1/3x horizontal force. Where anchorage details are not
indicated on drawings, the field installation shall be subject to approval of Structural
Engineer and the DSA Field Engineer.
L.
The representation of physical placement of existing conduits has been developed from the
best information available to the District at the time the drawings were prepared. The
District provides this information only as a general guideline for the convenience of
Bidders/Contractors and does not guarantee or warrant in any way, expressed or implied,
the accuracy of these representations. Nothing in this disclaimer affects, in any way, the
duty of the Contractor to furnish accurate “As Built” Drawings after completion of the
contract.
M.
In existing buildings, Contractors shall not work in areas contaminated by asbestos until the
asbestos materials have been removed or encapsulated.
O.
When trenching for new underground conduits, exercise care to avoid damage to existing
underground utilities. Contractor shall review existing as builts and scan the site to
determine the location of existing underground pipes, conduits and structures. Contractor
must make allowances in the bid for avoiding damage to existing underground piping,
conduit and structures and to adjust the routing of new underground conduits and location
of new underground pull boxes, vaults and maintenance holes.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
16050-7
GLENNEYRE PARKING STRUCTURE REHABILITATION
BFL OWEN
3.4 DEMOLITION
A.
Where electrical work to remain is damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work,
remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and
functionality.
B.
Accessible Work Indicated to Be Demolished: Remove exposed electrical installation
in its entirety.
C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring indicated to be abandoned in
place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match
existing finish.
3.6
D.
Removal: Remove demolished material from the Project site.
E.
Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make
operational components indicated for relocation.
F.
Downtime of power, signal, fire alarm, security, etc. circuits indicated to be intercepted
and reconnected that are feeding occupied portions of the facility shall be kept to a
minimum. All outages shall be coordinated with JWA representative. Provide temporary
power as required.
G.
Provide temporary power, signal, fire alarm and security systems as required to support
areas that are to remain operational during renovations.
H.
For all outages or interruption of power or sign service, the contractor shall furnish a
written plan which describes the outage, affected area and systems, length of outage and
recommendation of temporary services for any extended period of time. The contractor
to provide plan to the JWA representative a minimum of 21 days in advance of the
outage and obtain written authorization from the engineer to proceed.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces
necessary for electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades
involved.
B. Repair disturbed surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces.
3.7
TOUCHUP PAINTING
A.
Thoroughly clean damaged areas and provide primer, intermediate, and finish coats to
suit the degree of damage at each location.
B.
Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing
and application of successive coats.
END OF SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
16050-8